ADUC7019 [ADI]

Precision Analog Microcontroller 12-bit Analog I/O, ARM7TDMI MCU; 精密模拟微控制器12位模拟I / O , ARM7TDMI MCU
ADUC7019
型号: ADUC7019
厂家: ADI    ADI
描述:

Precision Analog Microcontroller 12-bit Analog I/O, ARM7TDMI MCU
精密模拟微控制器12位模拟I / O , ARM7TDMI MCU

微控制器
文件: 总92页 (文件大小:978K)
中文:  中文翻译
下载:  下载PDF数据表文档文件
Precision Analog Microcontroller 12-bit  
Analog I/O, ARM7TDMI® MCU  
ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27  
On-chip peripherals  
FEATURES  
Analog I/O  
Multichannel, 12-bit, 1 MSPS ADC  
Up to 16 ADC channels1  
Fully differential and single-ended modes  
0 to VREF analog input range  
12-bit voltage output DACs  
Up to 4 DAC outputs available1  
On-chip voltage reference  
On-chip temperature sensor ( 3°C)  
Voltage comparator  
UART, 2 × I2C® and SPI® serial I/O  
Up to 40-pin GPIO port1  
4 × general-purpose timers  
Wake-up and watchdog timers (WDT)  
Power supply monitor  
Three-phase, 16-bit PWM generator1  
Programmable logic array (PLA)  
External memory interface, up to 512 kB1  
Power  
Specified for 3 V operation  
Active mode: 11 mA @ 5 MHz; 40 mA @ 41.78 MHz  
Packages and temperature range  
From 40-lead 6 mm × 6 mm LFCSP to 80-lead LQFP1  
Fully specified for –40°C to +125°C operation  
Tools  
Microcontroller  
ARM7TDMI core, 16-bit/32-bit RISC architecture  
JTAG port supports code download and debug  
Clocking options  
Trimmed on-chip oscillator ( 3ꢀ)  
External watch crystal  
External clock source up to 44 MHz  
41.78 MHz PLL with programmable divider  
Memory  
Low-cost QuickStart™ development system  
Full third-party support  
APPLICATIONS  
Industrial control and automation systems  
Smart sensors, precision instrumentation  
Base station systems, optical networking  
62 kB flash/EE memory, 8 kB SRAM  
In-circuit download, JTAG-based debug  
Software triggered in-circuit reprogrammability  
FUNCTIONAL BLOCK DIAGRAM  
ADC0  
12-BIT  
DAC  
DAC0  
DAC1  
DAC2  
DAC3  
1MSPS  
MUX  
12-BIT ADC  
12-BIT  
DAC  
ADC11  
TEMP  
SENSOR  
ADuC7026  
12-BIT  
DAC  
CMP0  
CMP1  
BANDGAP  
REF  
12-BIT  
DAC  
CMP  
OUT  
V
REF  
PWM0  
PWM0  
PWM1  
PWM1  
PWM2  
PWM2  
H
L
H
L
H
L
THREE-  
PHASE  
PWM  
OSC  
XCLKI  
ARM7TDMI-BASED MCU WITH  
ADDITIONAL PERIPHERALS  
AND PLL  
XCLKO  
2k × 32 SRAM  
31k × 16 FLASH/EEPROM  
PSM  
PLA  
GPIO  
JTAG  
4 GENERAL  
PURPOSE TIMERS  
SERIAL I/O  
RST  
POR  
EXT. MEMORY  
INTERFACE  
2
UART, SPI, I C  
Figure 1.  
1 Depending on part model. See Ordering Guide for more information.  
Rev. A  
Information furnished by Analog Devices is believed to be accurate and reliable. However, no  
responsibility is assumed by Analog Devices for its use, nor for any infringements of patents or other  
rights of third parties that may result from its use. Specifications subject to change without notice.  
No license is granted by implication or otherwise under any patent or patent rights of Analog  
Devices.Trademarks and registered trademarks are theproperty of their respective owners.  
One Technology Way, P.O. Box 9106, Norwood, MA 02062-9106, U.S.A.  
Tel: 781.329.4700  
Fax: 781.461.3113  
www.analog.com  
©2006 Analog Devices, Inc. All rights reserved.  
 
 
 
ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27  
TABLE OF CONTENTS  
Features .............................................................................................. 1  
Transfer Function....................................................................... 37  
Typical Operation....................................................................... 38  
MMRs Interface.......................................................................... 38  
Converter Operation.................................................................. 40  
Driving the Analog Inputs ........................................................ 42  
Calibration................................................................................... 42  
Temperature Sensor ................................................................... 42  
Band Gap Reference................................................................... 42  
Nonvolatile Flash/EE Memory ..................................................... 43  
Programming.............................................................................. 43  
Security ........................................................................................ 44  
Flash/EE Control Interface ....................................................... 44  
Execution Time from SRAM and Flash/EE............................ 46  
Reset and Remap........................................................................ 46  
Other Analog Peripherals.............................................................. 48  
DAC.............................................................................................. 48  
Power Supply Monitor............................................................... 49  
Comparator................................................................................. 50  
Oscillator and PLL—Power Control........................................ 51  
Digital Peripherals.......................................................................... 53  
Three-Phase PWM..................................................................... 53  
General-Purpose Input/Output................................................ 60  
Serial Port Mux........................................................................... 62  
UART Serial Interface................................................................ 62  
Serial Peripheral Interface......................................................... 65  
I2C Compatible Interfaces ......................................................... 67  
Programmable Logic Array (PLA)........................................... 71  
Processor Reference Peripherals................................................... 74  
Interrupt System......................................................................... 74  
Timers.......................................................................................... 75  
External Memory Interfacing ................................................... 79  
Applications....................................................................................... 1  
Functional Block Diagram .............................................................. 1  
Revision History ............................................................................... 3  
General Description......................................................................... 4  
Detailed Block Diagram .............................................................. 5  
Specifications..................................................................................... 6  
Timing Specifications .................................................................. 9  
Absolute Maximum Ratings.......................................................... 16  
ESD Caution................................................................................ 16  
Pin Configurations and Function Descriptions ......................... 17  
ADuC7019/ADuC7020/ADuC7021/ADuC7022 .................. 17  
ADuC7024/ADuC7025 ............................................................. 20  
ADuC7026/ADuC7027 ............................................................. 23  
Typical Performance Characteristics ........................................... 27  
Terminology .................................................................................... 30  
ADC Specifications .................................................................... 30  
DAC Specifications..................................................................... 30  
Overview of the ARM7TDMI Core............................................. 31  
Thumb Mode (T)........................................................................ 31  
Long Multiply (M)...................................................................... 31  
EmbeddedICE (I) ....................................................................... 31  
Exceptions ................................................................................... 31  
ARM Registers ............................................................................ 31  
Interrupt Latency........................................................................ 32  
Memory Organization ................................................................... 33  
Memory Access........................................................................... 33  
Flash/EE Memory....................................................................... 33  
SRAM........................................................................................... 33  
Memory Mapped Registers ....................................................... 33  
ADC Circuit Overview.................................................................. 37  
Rev. A | Page 2 of 92  
ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27  
Hardware Design Considerations.................................................83  
Power Supplies.............................................................................83  
Grounding and Board Layout Recommendations .................84  
Clock Oscillator...........................................................................84  
Power-on Reset Operation.........................................................85  
Typical System Configuration...................................................85  
Development Tools .........................................................................86  
PC-Based Tools ...........................................................................86  
In-Circuit Serial Downloader ...................................................86  
Outline Dimensions........................................................................87  
Ordering Guide ...........................................................................89  
REVISION HISTORY  
1/06—Rev. 0 to Rev. A  
Changes to Table 1 ............................................................................6  
Added the Flash/EE Memory Reliability Section .......................43  
Changes to Table 30 ........................................................................52  
Changes to Serial Peripheral Interface .........................................66  
Changes to Ordering Guide...........................................................90  
10/05—Revision 0: Initial Version  
Rev. A | Page 3 of 92  
 
ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27  
GENERAL DESCRIPTION  
The ADuC7019/7020/7021/7022/7024/7025/7026/7027 are fully  
integrated, 1 MSPS, 12-bit data acquisition systems incorporat-  
ing high performance multichannel ADCs, 16-bit/32-bit MCUs  
and Flash/EE memory on a single chip.  
The devices operate from an on-chip oscillator and a PLL  
generating an internal high frequency clock of 41.78 MHz. This  
clock is routed through a programmable clock divider from  
which the MCU core clock operating frequency is generated.  
The microcontroller core is an ARM7TDMI, 16-bit/32-bit RISC  
machine, which offers up to 41 MIPS peak performance. Eight  
kilobytes of SRAM and 62 kilobytes of nonvolatile Flash/EE  
memory are provided on-chip. The ARM7TDMI core views all  
memory and registers as a single linear array.  
The ADC consists of up to 12 single-ended inputs. An  
additional four inputs are available but are multiplexed  
with the four DAC output pins. The four DAC outputs are  
only available on certain models (ADuC7020, and ADuC7026).  
However, in many cases where the DAC outputs are not present,  
these pins can still be used as additional ADC inputs, giving a  
maximum of 16 ADC input channels. The ADC can operate in  
single-ended or differential input modes. The ADC input  
voltage is 0 to VREF. Low-drift bandgap reference, temperature  
sensor, and voltage comparator complete the ADC peripheral  
set.  
On-chip factory firmware supports in-circuit serial download  
via the UART or I2C serial interface ports, while nonintrusive  
emulation is also supported via the JTAG interface. These  
features are incorporated into a low-cost QuickStart™  
Development System supporting this MicroConverter® family.  
The parts operate from 2.7 V to 3.6 V and are specified over an  
industrial temperature range of −40°C to +125°C. When operating  
at 41.78 MHz, the power dissipation is typically 120 mW. The  
ADuC7019/7020/7021/7022/7024/7025/7026/7027 are available in  
a variety of memory models and packages.  
Depending on the part model, up to four buffered voltage  
output DACs are available on-chip. The DAC output range is  
programmable to one of three voltage ranges.  
Rev. A | Page 4 of 92  
 
ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27  
DETAILED BLOCK DIAGRAM  
8
72 71 67 73 74  
53 26 25 54  
28 27 37  
75 70 69  
12-BIT  
ADuC7026*  
10  
11  
VOLTAGE  
BUF  
BUF  
BUF  
BUF  
DAC0*/ADC12  
DAC1*/ADC13  
77  
ADC0  
ADC1 78  
79  
OUTPUTDAC  
12-BIT SAR  
ADC 1MSPS  
ADC  
ADC2/CMP0  
ADC3/CMP1 80  
12-BIT  
VOLTAGE  
OUTPUTDAC  
CONTROL  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
ADC4  
ADC5  
ADC6  
ADC7  
ADC8  
ADC9  
ADC10  
DAC  
CONTROL  
12-BIT  
VOLTAGE  
OUTPUTDAC  
12 DAC2*/ADC14  
MUX  
12-BIT  
VOLTAGE  
OUTPUTDAC  
13  
DAC3*/ADC15  
ADC11 76  
TEMP  
29 P3.0/AD0/PWM0 /PLAI[8]  
H
SENSOR  
9
ADCNEG  
62KBYTES FLASH/EE  
(31k × 16 BITS)  
30 P3.1/AD1/PWM0 /PLAI[9]  
L
31  
32  
P3.2/AD2/PWM1 /PLAI[10]  
H
THREE-  
PHASE  
PWM  
ARM7TDMI  
P3.3/AD3/PWM1 /PLAI[11]  
L
8192 BYTES USER RAM  
/IRQ  
(2k × 32 BITS)  
MUX  
38 P3.4/AD4/PWM2 /PLAI[12]  
H
CMP  
OUT  
WAKEUP/  
RTC TIMER  
MCU  
CORE  
DAC  
39 P3.5/AD5/PWM2 /PLAI[13]  
L
BM/P0.0/CMP  
/PLAI[7]/MS2 20  
OUT  
46  
47  
P3.6/AD6/PWM  
P3.7/AD7/PWM  
/PLAI[14]  
/PLAI[15]  
TRIP  
POWER SUPPLY  
MONITOR  
DOWNLOADER  
SYNC  
68  
V
V
REF  
REF  
OSC  
BAND GAP  
REFERENCE  
44  
XCLKO  
PROG. CLOCK  
DIVIDER  
PLL  
45 XCLKI  
43  
P0.7/ECLK/XCLK/SPM8/PLAO[4]  
2
SPI/I C SERIAL  
INTERFACE  
UART  
SERIAL PORT  
P4.6/AD14/PLAO[14] 18  
P4.7/AD15/PLAO[15] 19  
PROG. LOGIC  
ARRAY  
40 IRQ0/P0.4/PWM  
/PLAO[1]/MS1  
/PLAO[2]/MS0  
TRIP  
INTERRUPT  
CONTROLLER  
POR  
21  
41  
IRQ1/P0.5/ADC  
BUSY  
SERIAL PORT MULTIPLEXER  
55 56 63 64 65 66 62 61 60 59 58 57 52 51  
42  
14 15 23 22 34  
49 50 17 33 35 36 48 24 16  
*SEE SELECTION TABLE FOR  
FEATURE AVAILABILITY ON  
DIFFERENT MODELS.  
Figure 2.  
Rev. A | Page 5 of 92  
 
ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27  
SPECIFICATIONS  
AVDD = IOVDD = 2.7 V to 3.6 V, VREF = 2.5 V internal reference, fCORE = 41.78 MHz, TA = 40°C to 125°C, unless otherwise noted.  
Table 1.  
Parameter  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Unit  
Test Conditions/Comments  
ADC CHANNEL SPECIFICATIONS  
ADC Power-Up Time  
DC Accuracy1, 2  
Eight acquisition clocks and fADC/2  
5
μs  
Resolution  
Integral Nonlinearity  
12  
Bits  
LSB  
LSB  
LSB  
LSB  
LSB  
0.6  
1.0  
0.5  
+0.7/−0.6  
1
1.5  
2.5 V internal reference  
1.0 V external reference  
2.5 V internal reference  
1.0 V external reference  
ADC input is a dc voltage  
Differential Nonlinearity3, 4  
+1/−0.9  
DC Code Distribution  
ENDPOINT ERRORS5  
Offset Error  
Offset Error Match  
Gain Error  
1
1
2
1
2
5
LSB  
LSB  
LSB  
LSB  
Gain Error Match  
DYNAMIC PERFORMANCE  
Signal-to-Noise Ratio (SNR)  
Total Harmonic Distortion (THD)  
Peak Harmonic or Spurious Noise  
Channel-to-Channel Crosstalk  
ANALOG INPUT  
fIN = 10 kHz sine wave, fSAMPLE = 1 MSPS  
Includes distortion and noise components  
69  
dB  
dB  
dB  
dB  
−78  
−75  
−80  
Measured on adjacent channels  
Input Voltage Ranges  
Differential Mode  
6
VCM  
V
VREF/2  
0 to VREF  
6
Single-Ended Mode  
Leakage Current  
Input Capacitance  
V
ꢀA  
pF  
1
20  
During ADC acquisition  
ON-CHIP VOLTAGE REFERENCE  
Output Voltage  
0.47 ꢀF from VREF to AGND  
2.5  
V
Accuracy  
5
mV  
ppm/°C  
dB  
TA = 25°C  
TA = 25°C  
Reference Temperature Coefficient  
Power Supply Rejection Ratio  
Output Impedance  
Internal VREF Power-On Time  
EXTERNAL REFERENCE INPUT7  
Input Voltage Range  
Input Impedance  
40  
75  
70  
1
Ω
ms  
0.625  
AVDD  
V
kΩ  
65  
DAC CHANNEL SPECIFICATIONS  
DC ACCURACY8  
RL = 5 kΩ, CL = 100 pF  
Resolution  
Relative Accuracy  
Differential Nonlinearity  
Offset Error  
Gain Error9  
12  
2
Bits  
LSB  
LSB  
mV  
%
1
15  
1
Guaranteed monotonic  
2.5 V internal reference  
Gain Error Mismatch  
0.1  
%
% of full scale on DAC0  
Rev. A | Page 6 of 92  
 
ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27  
Parameter  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Unit  
Test Conditions/Comments  
ANALOG OUTPUTS  
Output Voltage Range_0  
0 to  
V
DACREF range: DACGND to DACVDD  
DACREF  
Output Voltage Range_1  
Output Voltage Range_2  
0 to 2.5  
0 to  
V
V
DACVDD  
Output Impedance  
2
Ω
DAC AC CHARACTERISTICS  
Voltage Output Settling Time  
Digital to Analog Glitch Energy  
COMPARATOR  
10  
20  
ꢀs  
nV-sec  
1 LSB change at major carry  
Input Offset Voltage  
Input Bias Current  
Input Voltage Range  
Input Capacitance  
Hysteresis4, 6  
15  
1
mV  
ꢀA  
V
pF  
mV  
AGND  
2
AVDD − 1.2  
15  
7
3
Hysteresis can be turned on or off via the  
CMPHYST bit in the CMPCON register  
100 mV overdrive and configured with  
CMPRES = 11  
Response Time  
ꢀs  
TEMPERATURE SENSOR  
Voltage Output at 25°C  
Voltage TC  
780  
−1.3  
3
mV  
mV/°C  
°C  
Accuracy  
POWER SUPPLY MONITOR (PSM)  
IOVDD Trip Point Selection  
2.79  
3.07  
2.5  
V
V
%
V
Two selectable trip points  
Power Supply Trip Point Accuracy  
POWER-ON RESET  
GLITCH IMMUNITY ON RESET PIN3  
WATCHDOG TIMER (WDT)  
Timeout Period  
Of the selected nominal trip point voltage  
2.36  
50  
ꢀs  
0
512  
sec  
FLASH/EE MEMORY  
Endurance10  
Data Retention11  
10,000  
20  
cycles  
years  
TJ = 85°C  
DIGITAL INPUTS  
Logic 1 Input Current  
Logic 0 Input Current  
All digital inputs excluding XCLKI and XCLKO  
VIH = VDD or VIH = 5 V  
VIL = 0 V; except TDI on  
0.2  
−40  
1
−60  
ꢀA  
ꢀA  
ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25  
−80  
10  
−120  
0.8  
ꢀA  
pF  
VIL = 0 V; TDI, on ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25  
Input Capacitance  
LOGIC INPUTS3  
VINL, Input Low Voltage  
VINH, Input High Voltage  
LOGIC OUTPUTS  
VOH, Output High Voltage  
VOL, Output Low Voltage12  
CRYSTAL INPUTS XCLKI and XCLKO  
Logic Inputs, XCLKI Only  
VINL, Input Low Voltage  
VINH, Input High Voltage  
XCLKI Input Capacitance  
XCLKO Output Capacitance  
All logic inputs excluding XCLKI and XCLKO  
V
V
2.0  
2.4  
All digital outputs excluding XCLKI and XCLKO  
ISOURCE = 1.6 mA  
ISINK = 1.6 mA  
V
V
0.4  
1.1  
1.7  
20  
V
V
pF  
pF  
20  
Rev. A | Page 7 of 92  
ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27  
Parameter  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Unit  
kHz  
%
Test Conditions/Comments  
INTERNAL OSCILLATOR  
32.768  
3
MCU CLOCK RATE  
From 32 kHz Internal Oscillator  
From 32 kHz External Crystal  
Using an External Clock  
326  
41.78  
kHz  
CD = 7  
CD = 0  
TA = 85°C  
TA = 125°C  
Core clock = 41.78 MHz  
MHz  
MHz  
MHz  
0.05  
0.05  
44  
41.78  
START-UP TIME  
At Power-On  
From Pause/Nap Mode  
130  
24  
ms  
ns  
CD = 0  
CD = 7  
3.06  
1.58  
1.7  
ꢀs  
ms  
ms  
From Sleep Mode  
From Stop Mode  
PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC ARRAY (PLA)  
Pin Propagation Delay  
Element Propagation Delay  
12  
2.5  
ns  
ns  
From input pin to output pin  
13, 14  
POWER REQUIREMENTS  
Power Supply Voltage Range  
AVDD − AGND and IOVDD − IOGND  
Analog Power Supply Currents  
AVDD Current  
2.7  
3.6  
25  
V
200  
400  
3
ꢀA  
ꢀA  
ꢀA  
ADC in idle mode; all parts except ADuC7019  
ADC in idle mode; ADuC7019 only  
DACVDD Current15  
Digital Power Supply Current  
IOVDD Current in Normal Mode  
Code executing from Flash/EE  
CD = 7  
CD = 3  
CD = 0 (41.78 MHz clock)  
CD = 0 (41.78 MHz clock)  
TA = 85°C  
7
10  
15  
45  
30  
400  
1000  
mA  
mA  
mA  
mA  
ꢀA  
11  
40  
25  
250  
600  
IOVDD Current in Pause Mode  
IOVDD Current in Sleep Mode  
ꢀA  
TA = 125°C  
Additional Power Supply Currents  
ADC  
2
0.7  
700  
mA  
mA  
ꢀA  
@ 1 MSPS  
@ 62.5 kSPS  
per DAC  
DAC  
1 All ADC channel specifications are guaranteed during normal MicroConverter core operation.  
2 Apply to all ADC input channels.  
3 Measured using the factory set default values in ADCOF and ADCGN.  
4 Not production tested but supported by design and/or characterization data on production release.  
5 Measured using the factory set default values in ADCOF and ADCGN using an external AD845 op amp as an input buffer stage as shown in Figure 47. Based on  
external ADC system components, the user may need to execute a system calibration to remove external endpoint errors and achieve these specifications (see the  
Calibration section).  
6 The input signal can be centered on any dc common-mode voltage (VCM) as long as this value is within the ADC voltage input range specified.  
7 When using an external reference input pin, the internal reference must be disabled by setting the LSB in the REFCON memory mapped register to 0.  
8 DAC linearity is calculated using a reduced code range of 100 to 3995.  
9 DAC gain error is calculated using a reduced code range of 100 to internal 2.5 V VREF  
.
10 Endurance is qualified as per JEDEC Standard 22 method A117 and measured at −40°C, +25°C, +85°C, and +125°C.  
11 Retention lifetime equivalent at junction temperature (TJ) = 85°C as per JEDEC Standard 22 method A117. Retention lifetime derates with junction temperature.  
12 Test carried out with a maximum of eight I/O set to a low output level.  
13 Power supply current consumption is measured in normal, pause, and sleep modes under the following conditions: Normal Mode: 3.6 V supply, Pause Mode: 3.6 V  
supply, Sleep Mode: 3.6 V supply.  
14 IOVDD power supply current decreases typically by 2 mA during a flash/EE erase cycle.  
15 On the ADuC7019/20/21/22, this current must be added to AVDD current.  
Rev. A | Page 8 of 92  
 
ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27  
TIMING SPECIFICATIONS  
Table 2. External Memory Write Cycle  
Parameter  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Unit  
CLK  
UCLK  
TMS_AFTER_CLKH  
TADDR_AFTER_CLKH  
TAE_H_AFTER_MS  
TAE  
THOLD_ADDR_AFTER_AE_L  
THOLD_ADDR_BEFORE_WR_L  
TWR_L_AFTER_AE_L  
TDATA_AFTER_WR_L  
TWR  
TWR_H_AFTER_CLKH  
THOLD_DATA_AFTER_WR_H  
TBEN_AFTER_AE_L  
TRELEASE_MS_AFTER_WR_H  
0
4
4
8
ns  
ns  
½ CLK  
(XMxPAR[14:12] + 1) x CLK  
½ CLK + (!XMxPAR[10]) x CLK  
(!XMxPAR[8]) x CLK  
½ CLK + (!XMxPAR[10] + !XMxPAR[8]) x CLK  
8
0
12  
4
ns  
ns  
(XMxPAR[7:4] + 1) x CLK  
(!XMxPAR[8]) x CLK  
½ CLK  
(!XMxPAR[8] + 1) x CLK  
CLK  
CLK  
T
MS_AFTER_CLKH  
MS  
AE  
T
WR_L_AFTER_AE_L  
T
AE_H_AFTER_MS  
T
WR  
T
RELEASE_MS_AFTER_WR_H  
T
AE  
T
WR_H_AFTER_CLKH  
WR  
RD  
T
HOLD_DATA_AFTER_WR_H  
T
HOLD_ADDR_AFTER_AE_L  
T
HOLD_ADDR_BEFORE_WR_L  
T
T
ADDR_AFTER_CLKH  
DATA_AFTER_WR_L  
5678  
A/D[15:0]  
FFFF  
9ABC  
9ABE  
1234  
T
BEN_AFTER_AE_L  
BEN0  
BEN1  
A16  
Figure 3. External Memory Write Cycle  
Rev. A | Page 9 of 92  
 
ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27  
Table 3. External Memory Read Cycle  
Parameter  
CLK  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Unit  
UCLK  
TMS_AFTER_CLKH  
TADDR_AFTER_ CLKH  
TAE_H_AFTER_MS  
TAE  
THOLD_ADDR_AFTER_AE_L  
TRD_L_AFTER_AE_L  
TDATA_AFTER_RD_L  
TRD  
4
4
8
16  
ns  
ns  
½ CLK  
(XMxPAR[14:12] + 1) x CLK  
½ CLK + (!XMxPAR[10]) x CLK  
½ CLK + (!XMxPAR[10] + !XMxPAR[9]) x CLK  
8
0
12  
4
ns  
ns  
(XMxPAR[3:0] + 1) x CLK  
TRD_H_AFTER_CLKH  
THOLD_DATA_AFTER_RD_H  
TRELEASE_MS_AFTER_RD_H  
(!XMxPAR[9]) x CLK  
CLK  
CLK  
ECLK  
GP0  
T
MS_AFTER_CLKH  
T
AE_H_AFTER_MS  
T
RELEASE_MS_AFTER_RD_H  
T
T
RD_H_AFTER_CLKH  
AE  
T
RD_L_AFTER_AE_L  
AE  
WR  
T
RD  
RD  
T
HOLD_DATA_AFTER_RD_H  
T
DATA_AFTER_RD_L  
T
ADDR_AFTER_CLKH  
234B  
T
HOLD_ADDR_AFTER_AE_L  
A/D[15:0]  
FFFF  
CDEF  
D14A  
234A  
89AB  
BEN1  
BEN0  
A16  
Figure 4. External Memory Read Cycle  
Rev. A | Page 10 of 92  
ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27  
Table 4. I2C Timing in Fast Mode (400 kHz)  
Slave  
Parameter  
Description  
Min  
200  
100  
300  
100  
50  
100  
100  
1.3  
Max  
Master Typ  
1360  
1140  
251350  
740  
400  
Unit  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
μs  
ns  
ns  
ns  
tL  
tH  
SCLOCK low pulse width1  
SCLOCK high pulse width1  
Start condition hold time  
Data setup time  
Data hold time  
Setup time for repeated start  
Stop condition setup time  
Bus-free time between a stop condition and a start condition  
Rise time for both CLOCK and SDATA  
Fall time for both CLOCK and SDATA  
Pulse width of spike suppressed  
tSHD  
tDSU  
tDHD  
tRSU  
tPSU  
tBUF  
tR  
12.51350  
400  
100  
60  
300  
100  
50  
200  
20  
tF  
tSUP  
1 tHCLK depends on the clock divider or CD bits in PLLCON MMR. tHCLK = tUCLK/2CD  
.
tBUF  
tSUP  
tR  
MSB  
tF  
SDATA (I/O)  
MSB  
LSB  
ACK  
tDSU  
tDSU  
tDHD  
tDHD  
tPSU  
tR  
tSHD  
tRSU  
tH  
1
2–7  
8
9
1
SCLK (I)  
tL  
tSUP  
PS  
S(R)  
tF  
STOP  
START  
REPEATED  
START  
CONDITION CONDITION  
Figure 5. I2C Compatible Interface Timing  
Rev. A | Page 11 of 92  
 
ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27  
Table 5. SPI Master Mode Timing (PHASE Mode = 1)  
Parameter  
Description  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Unit  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
tSL  
tSH  
SCLOCK low pulse width1  
SCLOCK high pulse width1  
Data output valid after SCLOCK edge  
Data input setup time before SCLOCK edge2  
Data input hold time after SCLOCK edge2  
Data output fall time  
(SPIDIV + 1) × tHCLK  
(SPIDIV + 1) × tHCLK  
tDAV  
tDSU  
tDHD  
tDF  
tDR  
tSR  
25  
1 × tUCLK  
2 × tUCLK  
5
5
5
5
12.5  
12.5  
12.5  
12.5  
Data output rise time  
SCLOCK rise time  
SCLOCK fall time  
tSF  
ns  
1 tHCLK depends on the clock divider or CD bits in PLLCON MMR. tHCLK = tUCLK/2CD  
.
2 tUCLK = 23.9 ns. It corresponds to the 41.78 MHz internal clock from the PLL before the clock divider.  
SCLOCK  
(POLARITY = 0)  
tSH  
tSL  
tSR  
tSF  
SCLOCK  
(POLARITY = 1)  
tDAV  
tDF  
tDR  
MOSI  
MISO  
MSB  
BITS 6–1  
LSB  
MSB IN  
tDSU  
BITS 6–1  
LSB IN  
tDHD  
Figure 6. SPI Master Mode Timing (PHASE Mode = 1)  
Rev. A | Page 12 of 92  
 
ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27  
Table 6. SPI Master Mode Timing (PHASE Mode = 0)  
Parameter  
Description  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Unit  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
tSL  
tSH  
SCLOCK low pulse width1  
SCLOCK high pulse width1  
Data output valid after SCLOCK edge  
Data output setup before SCLOCK edge  
Data input setup time before SCLOCK edge2  
Data input hold time after SCLOCK edge2  
Data output fall time  
(SPIDIV + 1) × tHCLK  
(SPIDIV + 1) × tHCLK  
tDAV  
tDOSU  
tDSU  
tDHD  
tDF  
tDR  
tSR  
tSF  
25  
75  
1 × tUCLK  
2 × tUCLK  
5
5
5
5
12.5  
12.5  
12.5  
12.5  
Data output rise time  
SCLOCK rise time  
SCLOCK fall time  
1 tHCLK depends on the clock divider or CD bits in PLLCON MMR. tHCLK = tUCLK/2CD  
.
2 tUCLK = 23.9 ns. It corresponds to the 41.78 MHz internal clock from the PLL before the clock divider.  
SCLOCK  
(POLARITY = 0)  
tSH  
tSL  
tSR  
tSF  
SCLOCK  
(POLARITY = 1)  
tDAV  
tDOSU  
tDF  
tDR  
MOSI  
MISO  
MSB  
BITS 6–1  
LSB  
MSB IN  
tDSU  
BITS 6–1  
LSB IN  
tDHD  
Figure 7. SPI Master Mode Timing (PHASE Mode = 0)  
Rev. A | Page 13 of 92  
 
ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27  
Table 7. SPI Slave Mode Timing (PHASE Mode = 1)  
Parameter  
Description  
CS to SCLOCK edge1  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Unit  
tCS  
2 × tHCLK  
2 × tUCLK  
+
ns  
tSL  
tSH  
SCLOCK low pulse width2  
SCLOCK high pulse width2  
Data output valid after SCLOCK edge  
Data input setup time before SCLOCK edge1  
Data input hold time after SCLOCK edge1  
Data output fall time  
Data output rise time  
SCLOCK rise time  
SCLOCK fall time  
CS high after SCLOCK edge  
(SPIDIV + 1) × tHCLK  
(SPIDIV + 1) × tHCLK  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
tDAV  
tDSU  
tDHD  
tDF  
tDR  
tSR  
25  
1 × tUCLK  
2 × tUCLK  
5
5
5
5
12.5  
12.5  
12.5  
12.5  
tSF  
tSFS  
0
1 tUCLK = 23.9 ns. It corresponds to the 41.78 MHz internal clock from the PLL before the clock divider.  
2 tHCLK depends on the clock divider or CD bits in PLLCON MMR. tHCLK = tUCLK/2CD  
.
CS  
tSFS  
tCS  
SCLOCK  
(POLARITY = 0)  
tSH  
tSL  
tSR  
tSF  
SCLOCK  
(POLARITY = 1)  
tDAV  
tDF  
tDR  
MISO  
MOSI  
MSB  
BITS 6–1  
LSB  
MSB IN  
BITS 6–1  
LSB IN  
tDSU  
tDHD  
Figure 8. SPI Slave Mode Timing (PHASE Mode = 1)  
Rev. A | Page 14 of 92  
 
ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27  
Table 8. SPI Slave Mode Timing (PHASE Mode = 0)  
Parameter  
Description  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Unit  
tCS  
CS to SCLOCK edge1  
2 × tHCLK  
2 × tUCLK  
+
ns  
tSL  
tSH  
tDAV  
tDSU  
tDHD  
tDF  
tDR  
tSR  
tSF  
tDOCS  
tSFS  
SCLOCK low pulse width2  
(SPIDIV + 1) × tHCLK  
(SPIDIV + 1) × tHCLK  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
SCLOCK high pulse width2  
Data output valid after SCLOCK edge  
Data input setup time before SCLOCK edge1  
Data input hold time after SCLOCK edge1  
Data output fall time  
25  
1 × tUCLK  
2 × tUCLK  
5
5
5
5
12.5  
12.5  
12.5  
12.5  
25  
Data output rise time  
SCLOCK rise time  
SCLOCK fall time  
Data output valid after CS edge  
CS high after SCLOCK edge  
0
1 tUCLK = 23.9 ns. It corresponds to the 41.78 MHz internal clock from the PLL before the clock divider.  
2 tHCLK depends on the clock divider or CD bits in PLLCON MMR. tHCLK = tUCLK/2CD  
.
CS  
tCS  
tSFS  
SCLOCK  
(POLARITY = 0)  
tSH  
tSL  
tSF  
tSR  
SCLOCK  
(POLARITY = 1)  
tDAV  
tDOCS  
tDF  
tDR  
MISO  
MOSI  
MSB  
BITS 6–1  
LSB  
MSB IN  
tDSU  
BITS 6–1  
LSB IN  
tDHD  
Figure 9. SPI Slave Mode Timing (PHASE Mode = 0)  
Rev. A | Page 15 of 92  
 
ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27  
ABSOLUTE MAXIMUM RATINGS  
AGND = REFGND = DACGND = GNDREF  
TA = 25°C, unless otherwise noted.  
;
Table 9.  
Parameter  
AVDD to IOVDD  
AGND to DGND  
IOVDD to IOGND, AVDD to AGND  
Digital Input Voltage to IOGND  
Digital Output Voltage to IOGND  
VREF to AGND  
Stresses above those listed under Absolute Maximum Ratings  
may cause permanent damage to the device. This is a stress  
rating only; functional operation of the device at these or any  
other conditions above those indicated in the operational  
section of this specification is not implied. Exposure to absolute  
maximum rating conditions for extended periods may affect  
device reliability.  
Rating  
−0.3 V to +0.3 V  
−0.3 V to +0.3 V  
−0.3 V to +6 V  
−0.3 V to +5.3 V  
−0.3 V to IOVDD + 0.3 V  
−0.3 V to AVDD + 0.3 V  
−0.3 V to AVDD + 0.3 V  
−0.3 V to AVDD + 0.3 V  
Analog Inputs to AGND  
Only one absolute maximum rating can be applied at any one  
time.  
Analog Outputs to AGND  
Operating Temperature Range  
Industrial  
Storage Temperature Range  
Junction Temperature  
–40°C to +125°C  
–65°C to +150°C  
150°C  
26°C/W  
θJA Thermal Impedance (40-pin CSP)  
θJA Thermal Impedance (64-pin CSP)  
θJA Thermal Impedance (64-pin LQFP)  
θJA Thermal Impedance (80-pin LQFP)  
Peak Solder Reflow Temperature  
SnPb Assemblies (10 sec to 30 sec)  
24°C/W  
47°C/W  
38°C/W  
240°C  
Pb-Free Assemblies (20 sec to 40 sec) 260°C  
ESD CAUTION  
ESD (electrostatic discharge) sensitive device. Electrostatic charges as high as 4000 V readily accumulate on  
the human body and test equipment and can discharge without detection. Although this product features  
proprietary ESD protection circuitry, permanent damage may occur on devices subjected to high energy  
electrostatic discharges. Therefore, proper ESD precautions are recommended to avoid performance  
degradation or loss of functionality.  
Rev. A | Page 16 of 92  
 
ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27  
PIN CONFIGURATIONS AND FUNCTION DESCRIPTIONS  
ADuC7019/ADuC7020/ADuC7021/ADuC7022  
ADC3/CMP1  
ADC4  
GNDREF  
DAC0/ADC12  
DAC1/ADC13  
DAC2/ADC14  
DAC3/ADC15  
TMS  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
30 P1.3/SPM3/PLAI[3]  
ADC4  
ADC5  
ADC6  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
30 P1.3/SPM3/PLAI[3]  
PIN 1  
INDICATOR  
PIN 1  
INDICATOR  
29 P1.4/SPM4/PLAI[4]/IRQ2  
28 P1.5/SPM5/PLAI[5]/IRQ3  
27 P1.6/SPM6/PLAI[6]  
29 P1.4/SPM4/PLAI[4]/IRQ2  
28 P1.5/SPM5/PLAI[5]/IRQ3  
27 P1.6/SPM6/PLAI[6]  
ADC7  
ADuC7019/  
26 P1.7/SPM7/PLAO[0]  
25 XCLKI  
GNDREF  
DAC0/ADC12  
DAC1/ADC13  
TMS  
26 P1.7/SPM7/PLAO[0]  
25 XCLKI  
ADuC7020  
ADuC7021  
TOP VIEW  
(Not to Scale)  
TOP VIEW  
24 XCLKO  
24 XCLKO  
(Not to Scale)  
23 P0.7/ECLK/XCLK/SPM8/PLAO[4]  
22 P2.0/SPM9/PLAO[5]/CONVSTART  
21 IRQ1/P0.5/ADCBUSY/PLAO[2]  
23 P0.7/ECLK/XCLK/SPM8/PLAO[4]  
22 P2.0/SPM9/PLAO[5]/CONVSTART  
21 IRQ1/P0.5/ADCBUSY/PLAO[2]  
TDI  
TDI  
BM/P0.0/CMPOUT/PLAI[7] 10  
BM/P0.0/CMPOUT/PLAI[7] 10  
Figure 10. ADuC7019/ADuC7020 40-Lead LFCSP_VQ Pin Configuration  
Figure 11. ADuC702140-Lead LFCSP_VQ Pin Configuration  
ADC5  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
30 P1.2/SPM2/PLAI[2]  
29 P1.3/SPM3/PLAI[3]  
28 P1.4/SPM4/PLAI[4]/IRQ2  
27 P1.5/SPM5/PLAI[5]/IRQ3  
26 P1.6/SPM6/PLAI[6]  
25 P1.7/SPM7/PLAO[0]  
24 XCLKI  
PIN 1  
INDICATOR  
ADC6  
ADC7  
ADC8  
ADC9  
ADuC7022  
GNDREF  
TMS  
TDI  
TOP VIEW  
(Not to Scale)  
23 XCLKO  
BM/P0.0/CMPOUT/PLAI[7]  
P0.6/T1/MRST/PLAO[3] 10  
22 P0.7/ECLK/XCLK/SPM8/PLAO[4]  
21 P2.0/SPM9/PLAO[5]/CONVSTART  
Figure 12. ADuC7022 40-Lead LFCSP_VQ Pin Configuration  
Rev. A | Page 17 of 92  
 
ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27  
Table 10. Pin Function Descriptions (ADuC7019/ADuC7020/ADuC7021/ADuC7022)  
Pin No.  
7019/7020 7021 7022 Mnemonic  
Description  
38  
39  
40  
1
37  
38  
39  
40  
36  
37  
38  
39  
ADC0  
ADC1  
ADC2/CMP0  
ADC3/CMP1  
Single-Ended or Differential Analog Input 0.  
Single-Ended or Differential Analog Input 1.  
Single-Ended or Differential Analog Input 2/Comparator Positive Input.  
Single-Ended or Differential Analog Input 3 (Buffered Input on  
ADuC7019)/Comparator Negative Input.  
2
3
1
2
40  
1
ADC4  
ADC5  
Single-Ended or Differential Analog Input 4.  
Single-Ended or Differential Analog Input 5.  
3
4
2
3
4
5
6
ADC6  
ADC7  
ADC8  
ADC9  
GNDREF  
Single-Ended or Differential Analog Input 6.  
Single-Ended or Differential Analog Input 7.  
Single-Ended or Differential Analog Input 8.  
Single-Ended or Differential Analog Input 9.  
5
Ground Voltage Reference for the ADC. For optimal performance, the  
analog power supply should be separated from IOGND and DGND.  
4
5
6
7
6
7
DAC0/ADC12  
DAC1/ADC13  
DAC2/ADC14  
DAC3/ADC15  
DAC0 Voltage Output/Single-Ended or Differential Analog Input 12.  
DAC1 Voltage Output/Single-Ended or Differential Analog Input 13.  
DAC2 Voltage Output/Single-Ended or Differential Analog Input 14.  
DAC3 Voltage Output on ADuC7020. On the ADuC7019, a 10 nF capacitor  
needs to be connected between this pin and AGND/Single-Ended or  
Differential Analog Input 15.  
8
9
10  
8
9
10  
7
8
9
TMS  
TDI  
Test Mode Select, JTAG Test Port Input. Debug and download access.  
Test Data In, JTAG Test Port Input. Debug and download access.  
Multifunction I/O Pin.  
BM/P0.0/CMPOUT/PLAI[7]  
Boot Mode (BM). The ADuC7019/20/21/22 enter serial download mode if  
BM is low at reset and execute code if BM is pulled high at reset through a  
1 kresistor. General-Purpose Input and Output Port 0.0/Voltage  
Comparator Output/Programmable Logic Array Input Element 7.  
11  
11  
10  
P0.6/T1/MRST/PLAO[3]  
Multifunction Pin, Driven Low After Reset. General-Purpose Output Port  
0.6/Timer1 Input/Power-On Reset Output/Programmable Logic Array  
Output Element 3.  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
TCK  
TDO  
IOGND  
IOVDD  
LVDD  
Test Clock, JTAG Test Port Input. Debug and download access.  
Test Data Out, JTAG Test Port Output. Debug and download access.  
Ground for GPIO. Typically connected to DGND.  
3.3 V Supply for GPIO and Input of the On-Chip Voltage Regulator.  
2.6 V Output of the On-Chip Voltage Regulator. This output must be  
connected to a 0.47 ꢀf capacitor to DGND only.  
17  
18  
17  
18  
16  
17  
DGND  
P0.3/TRST/ADCBUSY  
Ground for Core Logic.  
General-Purpose Input and Output Port 0.3/Test Reset, JTAG Test Port  
Input/ ADCBUSY Signal Output.  
19  
20  
19  
20  
18  
19  
RST  
Reset Input, Active Low.  
IRQ0/P0.4/PWMTRIP/PLAO[1]  
Multifunction I/O Pin. External Interrupt Request 0, Active High/General-  
Purpose Input and Output Port 0.4/PWM Trip External  
Input/Programmable Logic Array Output Element 1.  
21  
22  
23  
24  
21  
22  
23  
24  
20  
21  
22  
23  
IRQ1/P0.5/ADCBUSY/PLAO[2]  
Multifunction I/O Pin. External Interrupt Request 1, Active High/General-  
Purpose Input andOutput Port 0.5/ADCBUSY Signa l Output/Programmable  
Logic Array Output Element 2.  
Serial Port Multiplexed. General-Purpose Input and Output Port 2.0/UART/  
Programmable Logic Array Output Element 5/Start Conversion Input Signal  
for ADC.  
P2.0/SPM9/PLAO[5]/CONVSTART  
P0.7/ECLK/XCLK/SPM8/PLAO[4] Serial Port Multiplexed. General-Purpose Input and Output Port  
0.7/Output for External Clock Signal/Input to the Internal Clock Generator  
Circuits/UART/ Programmable Logic Array Output Element 4.  
XCLKO  
Output from the Crystal Oscillator Inverter.  
Rev. A | Page 18 of 92  
ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27  
Pin No.  
7019/7020 7021 7022 Mnemonic  
Description  
25  
26  
27  
28  
25  
26  
27  
28  
24  
25  
26  
27  
XCLKI  
Input to the Crystal Oscillator Inverter and Input to the Internal Clock  
Generator Circuits.  
Serial Port Multiplexed. General-Purpose Input and Output Port 1.7/UART,  
SPI/Programmable Logic Array Output Element 0.  
Serial Port Multiplexed. General-Purpose Input and Output Port 1.6/UART,  
SPI/Programmable Logic Array Input Element 6.  
Serial Port Multiplexed. General-Purpose Input and Output Port 1.5/UART,  
SPI/Programmable Logic Array Input Element 5/External Interrupt  
Request 3, Active High.  
P1.7/SPM7/PLAO[0]  
P1.6/SPM6/PLAI[6]  
P1.5/SPM5/PLAI[5]/IRQ3  
29  
29  
28  
P1.4/SPM4/PLAI[4]/IRQ2  
Serial Port Multiplexed. General-Purpose Input and Output Port 1.4/UART,  
SPI/Programmable Logic Array Input Element 4/External Interrupt  
Request 2, Active High.  
30  
31  
32  
33  
34  
35  
30  
31  
32  
33  
29  
30  
31  
32  
P1.3/SPM3/PLAI[3]  
P1.2/SPM2/PLAI[2]  
P1.1/SPM1/PLAI[1]  
P1.0/T1/SPM0/PLAI[0]  
P4.2/PLAO[10]  
Serial Port Multiplexed. General-Purpose Input and Output Port 1.3/UART,  
I2C1/Programmable Logic Array Input Element 3.  
Serial Port Multiplexed. General-Purpose Input and Output Port 1.2/UART,  
I2C1/Programmable Logic Array Input Element 2.  
Serial Port Multiplexed. General-Purpose Input and Output Port 1.1/UART,  
I2C0/Programmable Logic Array Input Element 1.  
Serial Port Multiplexed. General-Purpose Input and Output Port 1.0/  
Timer1 Input/UART, I2C0/Programmable Logic Array Input Element 0.  
General-Purpose Input and Output Port 4.2/Programmable Logic Array  
Output Element 10.  
2.5 V Internal Voltage Reference. Must be connected to a 0.47 ꢀF capacitor  
when using the internal reference.  
34  
33  
VREF  
36  
37  
35  
36  
34  
35  
AGND  
AVDD  
Analog Ground. Ground reference point for the analog circuitry.  
3.3 V Analog Power.  
Rev. A | Page 19 of 92  
ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27  
ADuC7024/ADuC7025  
ADC4  
ADC5  
ADC6  
ADC7  
ADC8  
ADC9  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
48 P1.2/SPM2/PLAI[2]  
47 P1.3/SPM3/PLAI[3]  
46 P1.4/SPM4/PLAI[4]/IRQ2  
45 P1.5/SPM5/PLAI[5]/IRQ3  
44 P4.1/PLAO[9]  
PIN 1  
INDICATOR  
ADuC7024/  
43 P4.0/PLAO[8]  
GND  
42 IOV  
REF  
DD  
ADuC7025  
ADCNEG  
DAC0/ADC12  
DAC1/ADC13 10  
TMS 11  
TDI 12  
P4.6/PLAO[14] 13  
P4.7/PLAO[15] 14  
41 IOGND  
40 P1.6/SPM6/PLAI[6]  
39 P1.7/SPM7/PLAO[0]  
TOP VIEW  
(Not to Scale)  
38 P3.7/PWM  
37 P3.6/PWM  
36 XCLKI  
/PLAI[15]  
/PLAI[14]  
SYNC  
TRIP  
35 XCLKO  
BM/P0.0/CMP /PLAI[7] 15  
OUT  
34 P0.7/ECLK/XCLK/SPM8/PLAO[4]  
P0.6/T1/MRST/PLAO[3] 16  
33 P2.0/SPM9/PLAO[5]/CONV  
START  
Figure 13. ADuC7024/ADuC7025 64-Lead LFCSP_VQ Pin Configuration  
ADC4  
ADC5  
ADC6  
ADC7  
ADC8  
ADC9  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
48 P1.2/SPM2/PLAI[2]  
47 P1.3/SPM3/PLAI[3]  
46 P1.4/SPM4/PLAI[4]/IRQ2  
45 P1.5/SPM5/PLAI[5]/IRQ3  
44 P4.1/PLAO[9]  
PIN 1  
INDICATOR  
ADuC7024/  
43 P4.0/PLAO[8]  
GND  
42 IOV  
REF  
DD  
ADuC7025  
ADCNEG  
DAC0/ADC12  
DAC1/ADC13 10  
TMS 11  
TDI 12  
P4.6/PLAO[14] 13  
P4.7/PLAO[15] 14  
41 IOGND  
40 P1.6/SPM6/PLAI[6]  
39 P1.7/SPM7/PLAO[0]  
TOP VIEW  
(Not to Scale)  
38 P3.7/PWM  
37 P3.6/PWM  
36 XCLKI  
/PLAI[15]  
/PLAI[14]  
SYNC  
TRIP  
35 XCLKO  
BM/P0.0/CMP /PLAI[7] 15  
OUT  
34 P0.7/ECLK/XCLK/SPM8/PLAO[4]  
P0.6/T1/MRST/PLAO[3] 16  
33 P2.0/SPM9/PLAO[5]/CONV  
START  
Figure 14. ADuC7024/ADuC7025 64-Lead LQFP Pin Configuration  
Rev. A | Page 20 of 92  
 
ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27  
Table 11. Pin Function Descriptions (ADuC7024/ADuC7025 64-Lead CSP and ADuC7024/ADuC7025 64-Lead LQFP)  
Pin No. Mnemonic  
Description  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
ADC4  
ADC5  
ADC6  
ADC7  
ADC8  
ADC9  
GNDREF  
Single-Ended or Differential Analog Input 4.  
Single-Ended or Differential Analog Input 5.  
Single-Ended or Differential Analog Input 6.  
Single-Ended or Differential Analog Input 7.  
Single-Ended or Differential Analog Input 8.  
Single-Ended or Differential Analog Input 9.  
Ground Voltage Reference for the ADC. For optimal performance, the analog power supply  
should be separated from IOGND and DGND.  
8
ADCNEG  
Bias Point or Negative Analog Input of the ADC in Pseudo Differential Mode. Must be connected  
to the ground of the signal to convert. This bias point must be between 0 V and 1 V.  
9
DAC0/ADC12  
DAC1/ADC13  
DAC0 Voltage Output/Single-Ended or Differential Analog Input 12. DAC outputs are not  
present on the ADuC7025.  
DAC1 Voltage Output/Single-Ended or Differential Analog Input 13. DAC outputs are not  
present on the ADuC7025.  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
TMS  
TDI  
JTAG Test Port Input, Test Mode Select. Debug and download access.  
JTAG Test Port Input, Test Data In. Debug and download access  
General-Purpose Input and Output Port 4.6/Programmable Logic Array Output Element 14.  
General-Purpose Input and Output Port 4.7/Programmable Logic Array Output Element 15.  
Multifunction I/O Pin. Boot mode. The ADuC7024/ADuC7025 enter download mode if BM is low at  
reset and executes code if BM is pulled high at reset through a 1 kresistor/General-Purpose Input  
and Output Port 0.0/Voltage Comparator Output/Programmable Logic Array Input Element 7.  
P4.6/PLAO[14]  
P4.7/PLAO[15]  
BM/P0.0/CMPOUT/PLAI[7]  
16  
P0.6/T1/MRST/PLAO[3]  
Multifunction Pin, Driven Low After Reset. General-Purpose Output Port 0.6/Timer1  
Input/Power-On Reset Output/Programmable Logic Array Output Element 3.  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
TCK  
TDO  
IOGND  
IOVDD  
LVDD  
JTAG Test Port Input, Test Clock. Debug and download access.  
JTAG Test Port Output, Test Data Out. Debug and download access.  
Ground for GPIO. Typically connected to DGND.  
3.3 V Supply for GPIO and Input of the On-Chip Voltage Regulator.  
2.6 V Output of the On-Chip Voltage Regulator. This output must be connected to a 0.47 ꢀF  
capacitor to DGND only.  
22  
23  
DGND  
P3.0/PWM0H/PLAI[8]  
Ground for Core Logic.  
General-Purpose Input and Output Port 3.0/PWM Phase 0 High-Side Output/Programmable  
Logic Array Input Element 8.  
24  
25  
26  
27  
P3.1/PWM0L/PLAI[9]  
P3.2/PWM1H/PLAI[10]  
P3.3/PWM1L/PLAI[11]  
P0.3/TRST/ADCBUSY  
General-Purpose Input and Output Port 3.1/PWM Phase 0 Low-Side Output/Programmable  
Logic Array Input Element 9.  
General-Purpose Input and Output Port 3.2/PWM Phase 1 High-Side Output/Programmable  
Logic Array Input Element 10.  
General-Purpose Input and Output Port 3.3/PWM Phase 1 Low-Side Output/Programmable  
Logic Array Input Element 11.  
General-Purpose Input and Output Port 0.3/JTAG Test Port Input, Test Reset/ADCBUSY Signal  
Output.  
28  
29  
RST  
Reset Input, Active Low.  
P3.4/PWM2H/PLAI[12]  
General-Purpose Input and Output Port 3.4/PWM Phase 2 High-Side Output/Programmable  
Logic Array Input 12.  
30  
31  
32  
33  
34  
P3.5/PWM2L/PLAI[13]  
General-Purpose Input and Output Port 3.5/PWM Phase 2 Low-Side Output/Programmable  
Logic Array Input Element 13.  
Multifunction I/O Pin. External Interrupt Request 0, Active High/General-Purpose Input and  
Output Port 0.4/PWM Trip External Input/Programmable Logic Array Output Element 1.  
Multifunction I/O Pin. External Interrupt Request 1, Active High/General-Purpose Input and  
Output Port 0.5/ADCBUSY Signal Output/Programmable Logic Array Output Element 2.  
Serial Port Multiplexed. General-Purpose Input and Output Port 2.0/UART/Programmable Logic  
Array Output Element 5/Start Conversion Input Signal for ADC.  
IRQ0/P0.4/PWMTRIP/PLAO[1]  
IRQ1/P0.5/ADCBUSY/PLAO[2]  
P2.0/SPM9/PLAO[5]/CONVSTART  
P0.7/ECLK/XCLK/SPM8/PLAO[4]  
Serial Port Multiplexed. General-Purpose Input and Output Port 0.7/Output for External Clock  
Signal/Input to the Internal Clock Generator Circuits/UART/Programmable Logic Array Output  
Element 4.  
35  
XCLKO  
Output from the Crystal Oscillator Inverter.  
Rev. A | Page 21 of 92  
ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27  
Pin No. Mnemonic  
Description  
36  
37  
XCLKI  
P3.6/PWMTRIP/PLAI[14]  
Input to the Crystal Oscillator Inverter and Input to the Internal Clock Generator Circuits.  
General-Purpose Input and Output Port 3.6/PWM Safety Cut Off/Programmable Logic Array  
Input Element 14.  
38  
39  
40  
P3.7/PWMSYNC/PLAI[15]  
P1.7/SPM7/PLAO[0]  
P1.6/SPM6/PLAI[6]  
General-Purpose Input and Output Port 3.7/PWM Synchronization Input Output/Programmable  
Logic Array Input Element 15.  
Serial Port Multiplexed. General-Purpose Input and Output Port 1.7/UART, SPI/Programmable  
Logic Array Output Element 0.  
Serial Port Multiplexed. General-Purpose Input and Output Port 1.6/UART, SPI/Programmable  
Logic Array Input Element 6.  
41  
42  
43  
44  
45  
IOGND  
IOVDD  
P4.0/PLAO[8]  
P4.1/PLAO[9]  
P1.5/SPM5/PLAI[5]/IRQ3  
Ground for GPIO. Typically connected to DGND.  
3.3 V Supply for GPIO and Input of the On-Chip Voltage Regulator.  
General-Purpose Input and Output Port 4.0/Programmable Logic Array Output Element 8.  
General-Purpose Input and Output Port 4.1/Programmable Logic Array Output Element 9.  
Serial Port Multiplexed. General-Purpose Input and Output Port 1.5/UART, SPI/Programmable  
Logic Array Input Element 5/External Interrupt Request 3, Active High.  
46  
47  
48  
49  
50  
P1.4/SPM4/PLAI[4]/IRQ2  
P1.3/SPM3/PLAI[3]  
P1.2/SPM2/PLAI[2]  
P1.1/SPM1/PLAI[1]  
P1.0/T1/SPM0/PLAI[0]  
Serial Port Multiplexed. General-Purpose Input and Output Port 1.4/UART, SPI/Programmable  
Logic Array Input Element 4/External Interrupt Request 2, Active High.  
Serial Port Multiplexed. General-Purpose Input and Output Port 1.3/UART, I2C1/Programmable  
Logic Array Input Element 3.  
Serial Port Multiplexed. General-Purpose Input and Output Port 1.2/UART, I2C1/Programmable  
Logic Array Input Element 2.  
Serial Port Multiplexed. General-Purpose Input and Output Port 1.1/UART, I2C0/Programmable  
Logic Array Input Element 1.  
Serial Port Multiplexed. General-Purpose Input and Output Port 1.0/Timer1 Input/UART,  
I2C0/Programmable Logic Array Input Element 0.  
51  
52  
53  
54  
55  
P4.2/PLAO[10]  
P4.3/PLAO[11]  
P4.4/PLAO[12]  
P4.5/PLAO[13]  
VREF  
General-Purpose Input and Output Port 4.2/Programmable Logic Array Output Element 10.  
General-Purpose Input and Output Port 4.3/Programmable Logic Array Output Element 11.  
General-Purpose Input and Output Port 4.4/Programmable Logic Array Output Element 12.  
General-Purpose Input and Output Port 4.5/Programmable Logic Array Output Element 13.  
2.5 V Internal Voltage Reference. Must be connected to a 0.47 ꢀF capacitor when using the  
internal reference.  
56  
57  
58  
59  
60  
61  
62  
63  
64  
DACREF  
DACGND  
AGND  
AVDD  
DACVDD  
ADC0  
ADC1  
ADC2/CMP0  
ADC3/CMP1  
External Voltage Reference for the DACs. Range: DACGND to DACVDD.  
Ground for the DAC. Typically connected to AGND.  
Analog Ground. Ground reference point for the analog circuitry.  
3.3 V Analog Power.  
3.3 V Power Supply for the DACs. Typically connected to AVDD.  
Single-Ended or Differential Analog Input 0.  
Single-Ended or Differential Analog Input 1.  
Single-Ended or Differential Analog Input 2/Comparator Positive Input.  
Single-Ended or Differential Analog Input 3/Comparator Negative Input.  
Rev. A | Page 22 of 92  
ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27  
ADuC7026/ADuC7027  
ADC4  
ADC5  
ADC6  
ADC7  
ADC8  
ADC9  
ADC10  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
60 P1.2/SPM2/PLAI[2]  
59 P1.3/SPM3/PLAI[3]  
58 P1.4/SPM4/PLAI[4]/IRQ2  
57 P1.5/SPM5/PLAI[5]/IRQ3  
56 P4.1/AD9/PLAO[9]  
55 P4.0/AD8/PLAO[8]  
PIN 1  
INDICATOR  
54 IOV  
53 IOGND  
DD  
GND  
REF  
ADuC7026/  
ADuC7027  
ADCNEG  
52 P1.6/SPM6/PLAI[6]  
51 P1.7/SPM7/PLAO[0]  
DAC0/ADC12 10  
DAC1/ADC13 11  
DAC2/ADC14 12  
DAC3/ADC15 13  
TMS 14  
50 P2.2/RS/PWM0 /PLAO[7]  
L
TOP VIEW  
49 P2.1/WS/PWM0 /PLAO[6]  
(Not to Scale)  
H
48 P2.7/PWM1 /MS3  
L
47 P3.7/AD7/PWM  
46 P3.6/AD6/PWM  
45 XCLKI  
/PLAI[15]  
SYNC  
/PLAI[14]  
TDI 15  
TRIP  
P0.1/PWM2 /BLE 16  
H
P2.3/AE 17  
P4.6/AD14/PLAO[14] 18  
P4.7/AD15/PLAO[15] 19  
44 XCLKO  
43 P0.7/ECLK/XCLK/SPM8/PLAO[4]  
42 P2.0/SPM9/PLAO[5]/CONV  
START  
/PLAO[2]/MS0  
BM/P0.0/CMP  
/PLAI[7]/MS2 20  
41 IRQ1/P0.5/ADC  
OUT  
BUSY  
Figure 15. ADuC7026/ADuC7027 80-Lead LQFP Pin Configuration  
Table 12. Pin Function Descriptions (ADuC7026/ADuC7027)  
Pin No. Mnemonic  
Description  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
ADC4  
ADC5  
ADC6  
ADC7  
ADC8  
ADC9  
ADC10  
GNDREF  
Single-Ended or Differential Analog Input 4.  
Single-Ended or Differential Analog Input 5.  
Single-Ended or Differential Analog Input 6.  
Single-Ended or Differential Analog Input 7.  
Single-Ended or Differential Analog Input 8.  
Single-Ended or Differential Analog Input 9.  
Single-Ended or Differential Analog Input 10.  
Ground Voltage Reference for the ADC. For optimal performance, the analog power supply  
should be separated from IOGND and DGND.  
9
ADCNEG  
Bias Point or Negative Analog Input of the ADC in Pseudo Differential Mode. Must be connected  
to the ground of the signal to convert. This bias point must be between 0 V and 1 V.  
10  
11  
12  
13  
DAC0/ADC12  
DAC1/ADC13  
DAC2/ADC14  
DAC3/ADC15  
DAC0 Voltage Output/Single-Ended or Differential Analog Input 12. DAC outputs are not  
present on the ADuC7027.  
DAC1 Voltage Output/Single-Ended or Differential Analog Input 13. DAC outputs are not  
present on the ADuC7027.  
DAC2 Voltage Output/Single-Ended or Differential Analog Input 14. DAC outputs are not  
present on the ADuC7027.  
DAC3 Voltage Output/Single-Ended or Differential Analog Input 15. DAC outputs are not  
present on the ADuC7027.  
Rev. A | Page 23 of 92  
 
ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27  
Pin No. Mnemonic  
Description  
14  
15  
16  
TMS  
TDI  
P0.1/PWM2H/BLE  
JTAG Test Port Input, Test Mode Select. Debug and download access.  
JTAG Test Port Input, Test Data In. Debug and download access.  
General-Purpose Input and Output Port 0.1/PWM Phase 2 High-Side Output/External Memory  
Byte Low Enable.  
17  
18  
P2.3/AE  
P4.6/AD14/PLAO[14]  
General-Purpose Input and Output Port 2.3/External Memory Access Enable.  
General-Purpose Input and Output Port 4.6/External Memory Interface/Programmable Logic  
Array Output Element 14.  
19  
20  
P4.7/AD15/PLAO[15]  
General-Purpose Input and Output Port 4.7/External Memory Interface/Programmable Logic  
Array Output Element 15.  
Multifunction I/O Pin. Boot Mode. The ADuC7026/ADuC7027 enter UART download mode if  
BM is low at reset and execute code if BM is pulled high at reset through a 1 kΩ resistor/  
General-Purpose Input and Output Port 0.0/Voltage Comparator Output/Programmable Logic  
Array Input Element 7/External Memory Select 2.  
BM/P0.0/CMPOUT/PLAI[7]/MS2  
21  
P0.6/T1/MRST/PLAO[3]/AE  
Multifunction Pin, Driven Low After Reset. General-Purpose Output Port 0.6/Timer1  
Input/Power-On Reset Output/Programmable Logic Array Output Element 3.  
22  
23  
24  
TCK  
TDO  
P0.2/ PWM2L/BHE  
JTAG Test Port Input, Test Clock. Debug and download access.  
JTAG Test Port Output, Test Data Out. Debug and download access.  
General-Purpose Input and Output Port 0.2/PWM Phase 2 Low-Side Output/External Memory  
Byte High Enable.  
25  
26  
27  
IOGND  
IOVDD  
LVDD  
Ground for GPIO. Typically connected to DGND.  
3.3 V Supply for GPIO and Input of the On-Chip Voltage Regulator.  
2.6 V Output of the On-Chip Voltage Regulator. This output must be connected to a 0.47 ꢀF  
capacitor to DGND only.  
28  
29  
DGND  
Ground for Core Logic.  
P3.0/AD0/PWM0H/PLAI[8]  
General-Purpose Input and Output Port 3.0/External Memory Interface/PWM Phase 0 High-  
Side Output/Programmable Logic Array Input Element 8.  
30  
31  
32  
33  
34  
35  
36  
P3.1/AD1/PWM0L/PLAI[9]  
P3.2/AD2/PWM1H/PLAI[10]  
P3.3/AD3/PWM1L/PLAI[11]  
P2.4/PWM0H/MS0  
General-Purpose Input and Output Port 3.1/External Memory Interface/PWM Phase 0 Low-  
Side Output/Programmable Logic Array Input Element 9.  
General-Purpose Input and Output Port 3.2/External Memory Interface/PWM Phase 1 High-  
Side Output/Programmable Logic Array Input Element 10.  
General-Purpose Input and Output Port 3.3/External Memory Interface/PWM Phase 1 Low-  
Side Output/Programmable Logic Array Input Element 11.  
General-Purpose Input and Output Port 2.4/PWM Phase 0 High-Side Output/External Memory  
Select 0.  
General-Purpose Input and Output Port 0.3/JTAG Test Port Input, Test Reset/ADCBUSY Signal  
Output.  
General-Purpose Input and Output Port 2.5/PWM Phase 0 Low-Side Output/External Memory  
Select 1.  
General-Purpose Input and Output Port 2.6/PWM Phase 1 High-Side Output/External Memory  
Select 2.  
P0.3/TRST/A16/ADCBUSY  
P2.5/PWM0L/MS1  
P2.6/PWM1H/MS2  
37  
38  
RST  
Reset Input, Active Low.  
P3.4/AD4/PWM2H/PLAI[12]  
General-Purpose Input and Output Port 3.4/External Memory Interface/PWM Phase 2 High-  
Side Output/Programmable Logic Array Input 12.  
39  
40  
P3.5/AD5/PWM2L/PLAI[13]  
General-Purpose Input and Output Port 3.5/External Memory Interface/PWM Phase 2 Low-  
Side Output/Programmable Logic Array Input Element 13.  
IRQ0/P0.4/PWMTRIP/PLAO[1]/MS1 Multifunction I/O Pin. External Interrupt Request 0, Active High/General-Purpose Input and  
Output Port 0.4/PWM Trip External Input/Programmable Logic Array Output Element  
1/External Memory Select 1.  
41  
42  
IRQ1/P0.5/ADCBUSY/PLAO[2]/MS0 Multifunction I/O Pin. External Interrupt Request 1, Active High/General-Purpose Input and  
Output Port 0.5/ADCBUSY Signal Output/Programmable Logic Array Output Element 2/External  
Memory Select 0.  
P2.0/SPM9/PLAO[5]/CONVSTART  
Serial Port Multiplexed. General-Purpose Input and Output Port 2.0/UART/Programmable Logic  
Array Output Element 5/Start Conversion Input Signal for ADC.  
Rev. A | Page 24 of 92  
ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27  
Pin No. Mnemonic  
Description  
43  
P0.7/ECLK/XCLK/SPM8/ PLAO[4]  
Serial Port Multiplexed. General-Purpose Input and Output Port 0.7/Output for External Clock  
Signal/Input to the Internal Clock Generator Circuits/UART/Programmable Logic Array Output  
Element 4.  
44  
45  
46  
XCLKO  
XCLKI  
Output from the Crystal Oscillator Inverter.  
Input to the Crystal Oscillator Inverter and Input to the Internal Clock Generator Circuits.  
General-Purpose Input and Output Port 3.6/External Memory Interface/PWM Safety Cut  
Off/Programmable Logic Array Input Element 14.  
P3.6/AD6/PWMTRIP/PLAI[14]  
47  
48  
49  
50  
51  
52  
P3.7/AD7/PWMSYNC/PLAI[15]  
P2.7/PWM1L/MS3  
General-Purpose Input and Output Port 3.7/External Memory Interface/PWM  
Synchronization/Programmable Logic Array Input Element 15.  
General-Purpose Input and Output Port 2.7/PWM Phase 1 Low-Side Output/External Memory  
Select 3.  
General-Purpose Input and Output Port 2.1/External Memory Write Strobe/PWM Phase 0  
High-Side Output/Programmable Logic Array Output Element 6.  
General-Purpose Input and Output Port 2.2/External Memory Read Strobe/PWM Phase 0 Low-  
Side Output/Programmable Logic Array Output Element 7.  
Serial Port Multiplexed. General-Purpose Input and Output Port 1.7/UART, SPI/Programmable  
Logic Array Output Element 0.  
Serial Port Multiplexed. General-Purpose Input and Output Port 1.6/UART, SPI/Programmable  
Logic Array Input Element 6.  
P2.1/WS/PWM0H/PLAO[6]  
P2.2/RS/PWM0L/PLAO[7]  
P1.7/SPM7/PLAO[0]  
P1.6/SPM6/PLAI[6]  
53  
54  
55  
IOGND  
IOVDD  
P4.0/AD8/PLAO[8]  
Ground for GPIO. Typically connected to DGND.  
3.3 V Supply for GPIO and Input of the On-Chip Voltage Regulator.  
General-Purpose Input and Output Port 4.0/External Memory Interface/Programmable Logic  
Array Output Element 8.  
56  
57  
58  
59  
60  
61  
62  
63  
64  
65  
66  
P4.1/AD9/PLAO[9]  
General-Purpose Input and Output Port 4.1/External Memory Interface/Programmable Logic  
Array Output Element 9.  
Serial Port Multiplexed. General-Purpose Input and Output Port 1.5/UART, SPI/Programmable  
Logic Array Input Element 5/External Interrupt Request 3, Active High.  
Serial Port Multiplexed. General-Purpose Input and Output Port 1.4/UART, SPI/Programmable  
Logic Array Input Element 4/External Interrupt Request 2, Active High.  
Serial Port Multiplexed. General-Purpose Input and Output Port 1.3/UART, I2C1/Programmable  
Logic Array Input Element 3.  
Serial Port Multiplexed. General-Purpose Input and Output Port 1.2/UART, I2C1/Programmable  
Logic Array Input Element 2.  
Serial Port Multiplexed. General-Purpose Input and Output Port 1.1/UART, I2C0/Programmable  
Logic Array Input Element 1.  
Serial Port Multiplexed. General-Purpose Input and Output Port 1.0/Timer1 Input/UART,  
I2C0/Programmable Logic Array Input Element 0.  
General-Purpose Input and Output Port 4.2/External Memory Interface/Programmable Logic  
Array Output Element 10.  
P1.5/SPM5/PLAI[5]/IRQ3  
P1.4/SPM4/PLAI[4]/IRQ2  
P1.3/SPM3/PLAI[3]  
P1.2/SPM2/PLAI[2]  
P1.1/SPM1/PLAI[1]  
P1.0/T1/SPM0/PLAI[0]  
P4.2/AD10/PLAO[10]  
P4.3/AD11/PLAO[11]  
P4.4/AD12/PLAO[12]  
P4.5/AD13/PLAO[13]  
General-Purpose Input and Output Port 4.3/External Memory Interface/Programmable Logic  
Array Output Element 11.  
General-Purpose Input and Output Port 4.4/External Memory Interface/Programmable Logic  
Array Output Element 12.  
General-Purpose Input and Output Port 4.5/External Memory Interface/Programmable Logic  
Array Output Element 13.  
67  
68  
REFGND  
VREF  
Ground for the Reference. Typically connected to AGND.  
2.5 V Internal Voltage Reference. Must be connected to a 0.47 ꢀF capacitor when using the  
internal reference.  
69  
70  
71, 72  
73, 74  
DACREF  
DACGND  
AGND  
AVDD  
External Voltage Reference for the DACs. Range: DACGND to DACVDD.  
Ground for the DAC. Typically connected to AGND.  
Analog Ground. Ground reference point for the analog circuitry.  
3.3 V Analog Power.  
Rev. A | Page 25 of 92  
ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27  
Pin No. Mnemonic  
Description  
75  
76  
77  
78  
79  
80  
DACVDD  
ADC11  
ADC0  
ADC1  
ADC2/CMP0  
ADC3/CMP1  
3.3 V Power Supply for the DACs. Typically connected to AVDD.  
Single-Ended or Differential Analog Input 11.  
Single-Ended or Differential Analog Input 0.  
Single-Ended or Differential Analog Input 1.  
Single-Ended or Differential Analog Input 2/Comparator Positive Input.  
Single-Ended or Differential Analog Input 3/Comparator Negative Input.  
Rev. A | Page 26 of 92  
ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27  
TYPICAL PERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICS  
1.0  
1.0  
0.8  
fS = 774kSPS  
fS = 774kSPS  
0.8  
0.6  
0.4  
0.6  
0.4  
0.2  
0.2  
0
0
–0.2  
–0.4  
–0.6  
–0.8  
–1.0  
–0.2  
–0.4  
–0.6  
–0.8  
–1.0  
0
1000  
2000  
3000  
4000  
0
1000  
2000  
3000  
4000  
ADC CODES  
ADC CODES  
Figure 16. Typical INL Error, fS = 774 kSPS  
Figure 19. Typical DNL Error, fS = 774 kSPS  
1.0  
0.8  
1.0  
0.8  
fS = 1MSPS  
fS = 1MSPS  
0.6  
0.6  
0.4  
0.4  
0.2  
0.2  
0
0
–0.2  
–0.4  
–0.6  
–0.8  
–1.0  
–0.2  
–0.4  
–0.6  
–0.8  
–1.0  
0
1000  
2000  
3000  
4000  
0
1000  
2000  
3000  
4000  
ADC CODES  
ADC CODES  
Figure 17. Typical INL Error, fS = 1 MSPS  
Figure 20. Typical DNL Error, fS = 1 MSPS  
1.0  
0
–0.1  
0
1.0  
0.9  
0.8  
0.7  
0.6  
0.5  
0.4  
0.3  
0.2  
0.1  
0
0.9  
0.8  
0.7  
0.6  
0.5  
0.4  
0.3  
0.2  
0.1  
0
–0.1  
–0.2  
–0.3  
–0.4  
–0.5  
–0.6  
–0.7  
–0.8  
–0.9  
–1.0  
–0.2  
–0.3  
–0.5  
–0.6  
–0.7  
–0.8  
–0.9  
–1.0  
WCN  
WCP  
WCP  
WCN  
1.0  
1.5  
2.0  
2.5  
3.0  
1.0  
1.5  
2.0  
2.5  
3.0  
EXTERNAL REFERENCE (V)  
EXTERNAL REFERENCE (V)  
Figure 18. Typical Worst Case INL Error vs. VREF, fS = 774 kSPS  
Figure 21. Typical Worst Case DNL Error vs. VREF, fS = 774 kSPS  
Rev. A | Page 27 of 92  
 
ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27  
9000  
8000  
7000  
6000  
5000  
4000  
3000  
2000  
1000  
0
75  
70  
65  
60  
55  
50  
45  
40  
–76  
–78  
–80  
–82  
–84  
–86  
–88  
SNR  
THD  
1161  
1162  
BIN  
1163  
1.0  
1.5  
2.0  
2.5  
3.0  
EXTERNAL REFERENCE (V)  
Figure 22. Code Histogram Plot, fs = 774 kSPS, VIN = 0.7 V  
Figure 25. Typical Dynamic Performance vs. VREF  
0
1500  
1450  
1400  
1350  
1300  
1250  
1200  
1150  
1100  
1050  
1000  
fS = 774kSPS,  
SNR = 69.3dB,  
THD = –80.8dB,  
PHSN = –83.4dB  
–20  
–40  
–60  
–80  
–100  
–120  
–140  
–160  
0
100  
200  
–50  
0
50  
100  
150  
FREQUENCY (kHz)  
TEMPERATURE (°C)  
Figure 23. Dynamic Performance, fS = 774 kSPS  
Figure 26. On-Chip Temperature Sensor Voltage Output vs. Temperature  
20  
0
39.8  
39.7  
39.6  
39.5  
39.4  
39.3  
39.2  
39.1  
39.0  
38.9  
fS = 1MSPS,  
SNR = 70.4dB,  
THD = –77.2dB,  
PHSN = –78.9dB  
–20  
–40  
–60  
–80  
–100  
–120  
–140  
–160  
0
50  
100  
150  
200  
–40  
0
25  
85  
125  
FREQUENCY (kHz)  
TEMPERATURE (°C)  
Figure 24. Dynamic Performance, fS = 1 MSPS  
Figure 27. Current Consumption vs. Temperature @ CD = 0  
Rev. A | Page 28 of 92  
ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27  
12.05  
12.00  
11.95  
11.90  
11.85  
11.80  
11.75  
11.70  
11.65  
11.60  
11.55  
1.4  
1.2  
1.0  
0.8  
0.6  
0.4  
0.2  
0
–40  
0
25  
85  
125  
–40  
0
25  
85  
125  
TEMPERATURE (°C)  
TEMPERATURE (°C)  
Figure 28. Current Consumption vs. Temperature @ CD = 3  
Figure 30. Current Consumption vs. Temperature in Sleep Mode  
7.85  
37.4  
7.80  
7.75  
7.70  
7.65  
7.60  
7.55  
7.50  
7.45  
7.40  
37.2  
37.0  
36.8  
36.6  
36.4  
36.2  
–40  
0
25  
85  
125  
62.25  
125.00  
250.00  
500.00  
1000.00  
TEMPERATURE (°C)  
SAMPLING FREQUENCY (kSPS)  
Figure 29. Current Consumption vs. Temperature @ CD = 7  
Figure 31. Current Consumption vs. ADC Speed  
Rev. A | Page 29 of 92  
 
ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27  
TERMINOLOGY  
The theoretical signal to (noise + distortion) ratio for an ideal  
N-bit converter with a sine wave input is given by  
ADC SPECIFICATIONS  
Integral Nonlinearity  
The maximum deviation of any code from a straight line  
passing through the endpoints of the ADC transfer function.  
The endpoints of the transfer function are zero scale, a point  
½ LSB below the first code transition and full scale, a point  
½ LSB above the last code transition.  
Signal to (Noise + Distortion) = (6.02 N + 1.76) dB  
Thus, for a 12-bit converter, this is 74 dB.  
Total Harmonic Distortion  
The ratio of the rms sum of the harmonics to the fundamental.  
Differential Nonlinearity  
The difference between the measured and the ideal 1 LSB  
change between any two adjacent codes in the ADC.  
DAC SPECIFICATIONS  
Relative Accuracy  
Otherwise known as endpoint linearity, relative accuracy is a  
measure of the maximum deviation from a straight line passing  
through the endpoints of the DAC transfer function. It is  
measured after adjusting for zero error and full-scale error.  
Offset Error  
The deviation of the first code transition (0000 . . . 000) to  
(0000 . . . 001) from the ideal, that is, +½ LSB.  
Gain Error  
Voltage Output Settling Time  
The deviation of the last code transition from the ideal AIN  
voltage (full scale − 1.5 LSB) after the offset error has been  
adjusted out.  
The amount of time it takes for the output to settle to within a  
1 LSB level for a full-scale input change.  
Signal to (Noise + Distortion) Ratio  
The measured ratio of signal to (noise + distortion) at the  
output of the ADC. The signal is the rms amplitude of the  
fundamental. Noise is the rms sum of all nonfundamental  
signals up to half the sampling frequency (fS/2), excluding dc.  
The ratio is dependent upon the number of quantization levels  
in the digitization process; the more levels, the smaller the  
quantization noise.  
Rev. A | Page 30 of 92  
 
ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27  
OVERVIEW OF THE ARM7TDMI CORE  
The ARM7® core is a 32-bit reduced instruction set computer  
(RISC). It uses a single 32-bit bus for instruction and data. The  
length of the data can be 8 bits, 16 bits, or 32 bits. The length of  
the instruction word is 32 bits.  
When a breakpoint or watchpoint is encountered, the  
processor halts and enters debug state. Once in a debug  
state, the processor registers can be inspected as well as the  
Flash/EE, the SRAM, and the memory mapped registers.  
The ARM7TDMI is an ARM7 core with four additional  
features:  
EXCEPTIONS  
ARM supports five types of exceptions and a privileged  
processing mode for each type. The five types of exceptions are:  
T support for the thumb (16 bit) instruction set  
D support for debug  
M support for long multiplications  
I includes the embeddedICE module to support embedded  
system debugging  
Normal interrupt or IRQ. This is provided to service  
general-purpose interrupt handling of internal and  
external events.  
Fast interrupt or FIQ. This is provided to service data  
transfer or communication channel with low latency. FIQ  
has priority over IRQ.  
THUMB MODE (T)  
An ARM instruction is 32 bits long. The ARM7TDMI processor  
supports a second instruction set that has been compressed  
into 16 bits, called the thumb instruction set. Faster execution  
from 16-bit memory and greater code density can usually be  
achieved by using the thumb instruction set instead of the ARM  
instruction set, which makes the ARM7TDMI core particularly  
suitable for embedded applications.  
Memory abort.  
Attempted execution of an undefined instruction.  
Software interrupt instruction (SWI). This can be used to  
make a call to an operating system.  
However, the thumb mode has two limitations:  
Typically, the programmer defines interrupt as IRQ, but for  
higher priority interrupt, that is, faster response time, the  
programmer can define interrupt as FIQ.  
Thumb code usually uses more instructions for the same  
job. As a result, ARM code is usually best for maximizing  
the performance of the time-critical code.  
ARM REGISTERS  
ARM7TDMI has a total of 37 registers: 31 general-purpose  
registers and six status registers. Each operating mode has  
dedicated banked registers.  
The thumb instruction set does not include some of the  
instructions needed for exception handling, which  
automatically switches the core to ARM code for exception  
handling.  
When writing user-level programs, 15 general-purpose 32-bit  
registers (R0 to R14), the program counter (R15) and the  
current program status register (CPSR) are usable. The  
remaining registers are only used for system-level programming  
and for exception handling.  
See the ARM7TDMI user guide for details on the core  
architecture, the programming model, and both the ARM and  
ARM thumb instruction sets.  
LONG MULTIPLY (M)  
When an exception occurs, some of the standard registers are  
replaced with registers specific to the exception mode. All  
exception modes have replacement banked registers for the stack  
pointer (R13) and the link register (R14) as represented in  
Figure 32. The fast interrupt mode has more registers (R8 to R12) for  
fast interrupt processing. This means the interrupt processing can  
begin without the need to save or restore these registers, and thus  
save critical time in the interrupt handling process.  
The ARM7TDMI instruction set includes four extra instruc-  
tions that perform 32-bit by 32-bit multiplication with 64-bit  
result, and 32-bit by 32-bit multiplication-accumulation (MAC)  
with 64-bit result. These results are achieved in fewer cycles  
than required on a standard ARM7 core.  
EMBEDDEDICE (I)  
EmbeddedICE provides integrated on-chip support for the core.  
The EmbeddedICE module contains the breakpoint and  
watchpoint registers that allow code to be halted for debugging  
purposes. These registers are controlled through the JTAG test port.  
Rev. A | Page 31 of 92  
 
ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27  
R0  
R1  
USABLE IN USER MODE  
INTERRUPT LATENCY  
SYSTEM MODES ONLY  
R2  
The worst case latency for a fast interrupt request (FIQ) consists  
of the following:  
R3  
R4  
R5  
The longest time the request can take to pass through  
the synchronizer  
R6  
R7  
R8_FIQ  
R9_FIQ  
R8  
R9  
The time for the longest instruction to complete  
(the longest instruction is an LDM) that loads all  
the registers including the PC  
R10_FIQ  
R11_FIQ  
R12_FIQ  
R13_FIQ  
R14_FIQ  
R10  
R11  
R12  
R13  
R14  
R15 (PC)  
R13_UND  
R13_IRQ  
R13_ABT  
R14_ABT  
R14_UND  
R14_IRQ  
R13_SVC  
R14_SVC  
The time for the data abort entry  
The time for FIQ entry  
SPSR_UND  
SPSR_IRQ  
SPSR_ABT  
SPSR_SVC  
CPSR  
SPSR_FIQ  
At the end of this time, the ARM7TDMI executes the instruc-  
tion at 0x1C (FIQ interrupt vector address). The maximum  
total time is 50 processor cycles, which is just under 1.2 μs in a  
system using a continuous 41.78 MHz processor clock.  
FIQ  
SVC  
ABORT  
MODE  
IRQ  
UNDEFINED  
MODE  
USER MODE  
MODE  
MODE  
MODE  
Figure 32. Register Organization  
More information relative to the programmers model and the  
ARM7TDMI core architecture can be found in the following  
documents from ARM:  
The maximum interrupt request (IRQ) latency calculation is  
similar, but must allow for the fact that FIQ has higher priority  
and could delay entry into the IRQ handling routine for an  
arbitrary length of time. This time can be reduced to 42 cycles  
if the LDM command is not used. Some compilers have an  
option to compile without using this command. Another  
option is to run the part in thumb mode, where the time  
is reduced to 22 cycles.  
DDI0029G, ARM7TDMI Technical Reference Manual  
DDI0100E, ARM Architecture Reference Manual  
The minimum latency for FIQ or IRQ interrupts is a total of  
five cycles, which consist of the shortest time the request can  
take through the synchronizer, plus the time to enter the  
exception mode.  
Note that the ARM7TDMI always runs in ARM (32-bit) mode  
when in privileged modes, for example, when executing  
interrupt service routines.  
Rev. A | Page 32 of 92  
 
 
ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27  
MEMORY ORGANIZATION  
The ADuC7019/7020/7021/7022/7024/7025/7026/7027  
incorporate two separate blocks of memory: 8 kB of SRAM and  
64 kB of on-chip Flash/EE memory. Sixty-two kilobytes of on-  
chip Flash/EE memory is available to the user, and the  
remaining 2 kB are reserved for the factory configured boot  
page. These two blocks are mapped as shown in Figure 33.  
FLASH/EE MEMORY  
The total 64 kB of Flash/EE memory is organized as 32 k ×  
16 bits (31 k × 16 bits is user space and 1 k × 16 bits is reserved  
for the on-chip kernel). The page size of this Flash/EE memory  
is 512 bytes.  
Sixty-two kilobytes of Flash/EE memory are available to the  
user as code and nonvolatile data memory. There is no  
distinction between data and program as ARM code shares the  
same space. The real width of the Flash/EE memory is 16 bits,  
which means that in ARM mode (32-bit instruction), two  
accesses to the Flash/EE are necessary for each instruction  
fetch. It is therefore recommended to use thumb mode when  
executing from Flash/EE memory for optimum access speed.  
The maximum access speed for the Flash/EE memory is  
41.78 MHz in thumb mode and 20.89 MHz in full ARM mode.  
More details about Flash/EE access time are outlined later in the  
Execution Time from SRAM and Flash/EE section of this data  
sheet.  
0xFFFFFFFF  
MMRs  
0xFFFF0000  
RESERVED  
0x40000FFFF  
EXTERNAL MEMORY REGION 3  
0x40000000  
RESERVED  
0x30000FFFF  
EXTERNAL MEMORY REGION 2  
0x30000000  
RESERVED  
0x20000FFFF  
EXTERNAL MEMORY REGION 1  
0x20000000  
RESERVED  
0x10000FFFF  
EXTERNAL MEMORY REGION 0  
0x10000000  
RESERVED  
0x0008FFFF  
SRAM  
FLASH/EE  
0x00080000  
Eight kilobytes of SRAM are available to the user, organized as  
2 k × 32 bits, that is, two words. ARM code can run directly  
from SRAM at 41.78 MHz, given that the SRAM array is  
configured as a 32-bit wide memory array. More details about  
SRAM access time are outlined later in the Execution Time  
from SRAM and Flash/EE section of this datasheet.  
RESERVED  
0x00011FFF  
SRAM  
0x00010000  
0x0000FFFF REMAPPABLE MEMORY SPACE  
0x00000000  
(FLASH/EE OR SRAM)  
Figure 33. Physical Memory Map  
Note that by default, after a reset, the Flash/EE memory is  
mirrored at address 0×00000000. It is possible to remap the  
SRAM at address 0×00000000 by clearing Bit 0 of the REMAP  
MMR. This remap function is described in more detail in the  
Flash/EE Memory section.  
MEMORY MAPPED REGISTERS  
The memory mapped register (MMR) space is mapped into the  
upper two pages of the memory array, and accessed by indirect  
addressing through the ARM7 banked registers.  
The MMR space provides an interface between the CPU and  
all on-chip peripherals. All registers, except the core registers,  
reside in the MMR area. All shaded locations shown in  
Figure 35 are unoccupied or reserved locations, and should  
not be accessed by user software. Table 13 shows the full MMR  
memory map.  
MEMORY ACCESS  
The ARM7 core sees memory as a linear array of 232 byte  
location where the different blocks of memory are mapped as  
outlined in Figure 33.  
The ADuC7019/7020/7021/7022/7024/7025/7026/7027  
memory organizations are configured in little endian format,  
which means that the least significant byte is located in the  
lowest byte address, and the most significant byte is in the  
highest byte address.  
The access time for reading from or writing to an MMR  
depends on the advanced microcontroller bus architecture  
(AMBA) bus used to access the peripheral. The processor has  
two AMBA busses: advanced high performance bus (AHB)  
used for system modules, and advanced peripheral bus (APB)  
used for lower performance peripheral. Access to the AHB is  
one cycle, and access to the APB is two cycles. All peripherals  
on the ADuC7019/7020/7021/7022/7024/7025/7026/7027 are  
on the APB except the Flash/EE memory, the GPIOs, and the  
PWM.  
BIT 31  
BIT 0  
BYTE 3 BYTE 2 BYTE 1 BYTE 0  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
0xFFFFFFFF  
B
7
3
A
6
2
9
5
1
8
4
0
0x00000004  
0x00000000  
32 BITS  
Figure 34. Little Endian Format  
Rev. A | Page 33 of 92  
 
 
ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27  
0xFFFFFFFF  
Table 13. Complete MMR List  
0xFFFFFC3C  
Access  
Byte Type  
Default  
Value  
PWM  
0xFFFFFC00  
Address Name  
Page  
IRQ address base = 0xFFFF0000  
0xFFFFF820  
FLASH CONTROL  
INTERFACE  
0x0000  
0x0004  
0x0008  
0x000C  
0x0010  
0x0100  
0x0104  
0x0108  
0x010C  
IRQSTA  
IRQSIG1  
IRQEN  
IRQCLR  
SWICFG  
FIQSTA  
FIQSIG1  
FIQEN  
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
R
R
R/W  
W
W
R
R
R/W  
W
0x00000000  
0x00XXX000 74  
0x00000000  
0x00000000  
0x00000000  
0x00000000  
0x00XXX000 75  
0x00000000  
0x00000000  
74  
0xFFFFF800  
0xFFFFF46C  
74  
74  
75  
74  
GPIO  
0xFFFFF400  
0xFFFF0B54  
PLA  
0xFFFF0B00  
0xFFFF0A14  
SPI  
0xFFFF0A00  
75  
75  
FIQCLR  
1 Depends on the level on the external interrupt pins (P0.4, P0.5, P1.4, and P1.5).  
0xFFFF0948  
2
I C1  
0xFFFF0900  
0xFFFF0848  
System control address base = 0xFFFF0200  
REMAP1  
RSTSTA  
RSTCLR  
1
1
1
R/W  
R/W  
W
0x00  
0x01  
0x00  
47  
47  
47  
2
0x0220  
0x0230  
0x0234  
I C0  
0xFFFF0800  
0xFFFF0730  
UART  
1 Depends on model.  
0xFFFF0700  
0xFFFF0620  
Timer address base = 0xFFFF0300  
DAC  
0xFFFF0600  
0x0300  
0x0304  
0x0308  
0x030C  
0x0320  
0x0324  
0x0328  
0x032C  
0x0330  
0x0340  
0x0344  
0x0348  
0x034C  
0x0360  
0x0364  
0x0368  
0x036C  
T0LD  
2
2
2
1
4
4
2
1
4
4
4
2
1
2
2
2
1
R/W  
R
R/W  
W
R/W  
R
R/W  
W
R/W  
R/W  
R
R/W  
W
R/W  
R
R/W  
W
0x0000  
0xFFFF  
0x0000  
0xFF  
0x00000000  
0xFFFFFFFF  
0x0000  
76  
76  
76  
76  
76  
76  
76  
77  
77  
77  
77  
78  
78  
78  
78  
78  
79  
0xFFFF0538  
T0VAL  
T0CON  
T0CLRI  
T1LD  
T1VAL  
T1CON  
T1CLRI  
T1CAP  
T2LD  
T2VAL  
T2CON  
T2CLRI  
T3LD  
T3VAL  
T3CON  
T3CLRI  
ADC  
0xFFFF0500  
0xFFFF0490  
BAND GAP  
REFERENCE  
0xFFFF048C  
0xFFFF0448  
POWER SUPPLY  
MONITOR  
0xFF  
0xFFFF0440  
0x00000000  
0x00000000  
0xFFFFFFFF  
0x0000  
0xFF  
0x0000  
0xFFFF  
0x0000  
0x00  
0xFFFF0420  
PLL AND  
OSCILLATOR CONTROL  
0xFFFF0404  
0xFFFF0370  
WATCHDOG  
TIMER  
0xFFFF0360  
0xFFFF0350  
WAKE UP  
TIMER  
0xFFFF0340  
0xFFFF0334  
GENERAL PURPOSE  
TIMER  
0xFFFF0320  
0xFFFF0310  
TIMER 0  
PLL base address = 0xFFFF0400  
0x0404  
0x0408  
0x040C  
0x0410  
0x0414  
0x0418  
POWKEY1  
POWCON  
POWKEY2  
PLLKEY1  
PLLCON  
2
2
2
2
1
2
W
R/W  
W
W
R/W  
W
0x0000  
0x0003  
0x0000  
0x0000  
0x21  
52  
52  
52  
52  
52  
52  
0xFFFF0300  
0xFFFF0238  
REMAP AND  
SYSTEM CONTROL  
0xFFFF0220  
0xFFFF0110  
INTERRUPT  
CONTROLLER  
0xFFFF0000  
PLLKEY2  
0x0000  
Figure 35. Memory Mapped Registers  
PSM address base = 0xFFFF0440  
0x0440  
0x0444  
PSMCON  
CMPCON  
2
2
R/W  
R/W  
0x0008  
0x0000  
49  
50  
Reference address base = 0xFFFF0480  
0x048C REFCON R/W  
1
0x00  
42  
Rev. A | Page 34 of 92  
 
 
 
 
ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27  
Access  
Byte Type  
Default  
Value  
Access  
Byte Type  
Default  
Value  
Address Name  
Page  
Address Name  
Page  
ADC address base = 0xFFFF0500  
I2C0 base address = 0xFFFF0800  
0x0500  
0x0504  
0x0508  
0x050C  
0x0510  
0x0514  
0x0530  
0x0534  
ADCCON  
ADCCP  
2
1
1
1
4
1
2
2
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R
0x0600  
0x00  
0x01  
0x00  
0x00000000  
0x00  
39  
39  
40  
40  
40  
40  
40  
40  
0x0800  
0x0804  
0x0808  
0x080C  
0x0810  
0x0814  
0x0818  
0x081C  
0x0824  
0x0828  
0x082C  
0x0830  
0x0838  
0x083C  
0x0840  
0x0844  
0x0848  
0x084C  
I2C0MSTA  
I2C0SSTA  
I2C0SRX  
I2C0STX  
I2C0MRX  
I2C0MTX  
I2C0CNT  
I2C0ADR  
I2C0BYTE  
I2C0ALT  
I2C0CFG  
I2C0DIV  
I2C0ID0  
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
2
R
R
R
W
R
W
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R
0x00  
0x01  
0x00  
0x00  
0x00  
0x00  
0x00  
0x00  
0x00  
0x00  
0x00  
0x1F1F  
0x00  
0x00  
0x00  
0x00  
0x01  
0x0000  
68  
68  
69  
69  
69  
69  
69  
69  
69  
69  
70  
70  
70  
70  
70  
70  
70  
71  
ADCCN  
ADCSTA  
ADCDAT  
ADCRST  
ADCGN  
ADCOF  
R
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
0x0200  
0x0200  
DAC address base = 0xFFFF0600  
0x0600  
0x0604  
0x0608  
0x060C  
0x0610  
0x0614  
0x0618  
0x061C  
DAC0CON  
DAC0DAT  
DAC1CON  
DAC1DAT  
DAC2CON  
DAC2DAT  
DAC3CON  
DAC3DAT  
1
4
1
4
1
4
1
4
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
0x00  
0x00000000  
0x00  
0x00000000  
0x00  
0x00000000  
0x00  
48  
48  
48  
48  
48  
48  
48  
48  
I2C0ID1  
I2C0ID2  
I2C0ID3  
I2C0CCNT  
I2C0FSTA  
0x00000000  
I2C1 base address = 0xFFFF0900  
UART base address = 0xFFFF0700  
0x0900  
0x0904  
0x0908  
0x090C  
0x0910  
0x0914  
0x0918  
0x091C  
0x0924  
0x0928  
0x092C  
0x0930  
0x0938  
0x093C  
0x0940  
0x0944  
0x0948  
0x094C  
I2C1MSTA  
I2C1SSTA  
I2C1SRX  
I2C1STX  
I2C1MRX  
I2C1MTX  
I2C1CNT  
I2C1ADR  
I2C1BYTE  
I2C1ALT  
I2C1CFG  
I2C1DIV  
I2C1ID0  
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
2
R
R
R
W
R
W
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R
0x00  
0x01  
0x00  
0x00  
0x00  
0x00  
0x00  
0x00  
0x00  
0x00  
0x00  
0x1F1F  
0x00  
0x00  
0x00  
0x00  
0x01  
0x0000  
68  
68  
69  
69  
69  
69  
69  
69  
69  
69  
69  
70  
70  
70  
70  
70  
70  
70  
0x0700  
COMTX  
COMRX  
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
R/W  
R
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R
R/W  
R/W  
R
0x00  
0x00  
0x00  
0x00  
0x00  
0x01  
0x00  
0x00  
0x60  
0x00  
0x00  
0x04  
0x01  
0xAA  
0x0000  
63  
63  
63  
63  
63  
63  
63  
64  
64  
64  
64  
65  
65  
65  
64  
COMDIV0  
COMIEN0  
COMDIV1  
COMIID0  
COMCON0  
COMCON1  
COMSTA0  
COMSTA1  
COMSCR  
COMIEN1  
COMIID1  
COMADR  
COMDIV2  
0x0704  
0x0708  
0x070C  
0x0710  
0x0714  
0x0718  
0x071C  
0x0720  
0x0724  
0x0728  
0x072C  
R
R/W  
R/W  
R
R/W  
R/W  
I2C1ID1  
I2C1ID2  
I2C1ID3  
I2C1CCNT  
I2C1FSTA  
SPI base address = 0xFFFF0A00  
0x0A00  
0x0A04  
0x0A08  
0x0A0C  
0x0A10  
SPISTA  
SPIRX  
SPITX  
SPIDIV  
SPICON  
1
1
1
1
2
R
R
W
R/W  
R/W  
0x00  
0x00  
0x00  
0x1B  
0x0000  
66  
66  
66  
66  
66  
Rev. A | Page 35 of 92  
ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27  
Access  
Byte Type  
Default  
Value  
Access  
Byte Type  
Default  
Value  
Address Name  
Page  
Address Name  
Page  
PLA base address = 0xFFFF0B00  
GPIO base address = 0xFFFFF400  
0x0B00  
0x0B04  
0x0B08  
0x0B0C  
0x0B10  
0x0B14  
0x0B18  
0x0B1C  
0x0B20  
0x0B24  
0x0B28  
0x0B2C  
0x0B30  
0x0B34  
0x0B38  
0x0B3C  
0x0B40  
0x0B44  
0x0B48  
0x0B4C  
0x0B50  
0x0B54  
PLAELM0  
PLAELM1  
PLAELM2  
PLAELM3  
PLAELM4  
PLAELM5  
PLAELM6  
PLAELM7  
PLAELM8  
PLAELM9  
PLAELM10  
PLAELM11  
PLAELM12  
PLAELM13  
PLAELM14  
PLAELM15  
PLACLK  
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
4
4
4
4
1
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R
0x0000  
0x0000  
0x0000  
0x0000  
0x0000  
0x0000  
0x0000  
0x0000  
0x0000  
0x0000  
0x0000  
0x0000  
0x0000  
0x0000  
0x0000  
0x0000  
0x00  
71  
71  
71  
71  
71  
71  
71  
71  
71  
71  
71  
71  
71  
71  
71  
71  
72  
73  
73  
73  
73  
73  
0xF400  
0xF404  
0xF408  
0xF40C  
0xF410  
0xF420  
0xF424  
0xF428  
0xF42C  
0xF430  
0xF434  
0xF438  
0xF43C  
0xF440  
0xF444  
0xF448  
0xF450  
0xF454  
0xF458  
0xF45C  
0xF460  
0xF464  
0xF468  
GP0CON  
GP1CON  
GP2CON  
GP3CON  
GP4CON  
GP0DAT  
GP0SET  
GP0CLR  
GP0PAR  
GP1DAT  
GP1SET  
GP1CLR  
GP1PAR  
GP2DAT  
GP2SET  
GP2CLR  
GP3DAT  
GP3SET  
GP3CLR  
GP3PAR  
GP4DAT  
GP4SET  
GP4CLR  
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
W
W
W
R/W  
W
W
W
R/W  
W
W
R/W  
W
W
W
R/W  
W
W
0x00000000  
0x00000000  
0x00000000  
0x00000000  
0x00000000  
0x000000XX 61  
0x000000XX 61  
0x000000XX 61  
60  
60  
60  
60  
60  
0x20000000  
61  
0x000000XX 61  
0x000000XX 61  
0x000000XX 61  
0x00000000  
61  
0x000000XX 61  
0x000000XX 61  
0x000000XX 61  
0x000000XX 61  
0x000000XX 61  
0x000000XX 61  
PLAIRQ  
PLAADC  
PLADIN  
PLADOUT  
PLALCK  
0x00000000  
0x00000000  
0x00000000  
0x00000000  
0x00  
0x00222222  
61  
0x000000XX 61  
0x000000XX 61  
0x000000XX 61  
W
External memory base address = 0xFFFFF000  
Flash/EE base address = 0xFFFFF800  
0xF000  
0xF010  
0xF014  
0xF018  
0xF01C  
0xF020  
0xF024  
0xF028  
0xF02C  
XMCFG  
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
0x00  
0x00  
0x00  
0x00  
80  
80  
80  
80  
80  
80  
80  
80  
80  
XM0CON  
XM1CON  
XM2CON  
XM3CON  
XM0PAR  
XM1PAR  
XM2PAR  
XM3PAR  
0xF800  
0xF804  
0xF808  
0xF80C  
0xF810  
0xF818  
0xF81C  
0xF820  
FEESTA  
1
2
1
2
2
3
4
4
R
0x20  
0x0000  
0x07  
0xXXXX  
0x0000  
0xFFFFFF  
0x00000000  
0xFFFFFFFF  
45  
45  
45  
45  
45  
45  
45  
45  
FEEMOD  
FEECON  
FEEDAT  
FEEADR  
FEESIGN  
FEEPRO  
FEEHIDE  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R
0x00  
0x70FF  
0x70FF  
0x70FF  
0x70FF  
R/W  
R/W  
PWM base address = 0xFFFFFC00  
0xFC00  
0xFC04  
0xFC08  
0xFC0C  
0xFC10  
0xFC14  
0xFC18  
0xFC1C  
0xFC20  
0xFC24  
PWMCON  
PWMSTA  
PWMDAT0  
PWMDAT1  
PWMCFG  
PWMCH0  
PWMCH1  
PWMCH2  
PWMEN  
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
0x0000  
0x0000  
0x0000  
0x0000  
0x0000  
0x0000  
0x0000  
0x0000  
0x0000  
0x0000  
59  
59  
60  
60  
59  
60  
60  
60  
59  
60  
PWMDAT2  
Rev. A | Page 36 of 92  
ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27  
ADC CIRCUIT OVERVIEW  
The analog-to-digital converter (ADC) incorporates a fast,  
multichannel, 12-bit ADC. It can operate from 2.7 V to 3.6 V  
supplies and is capable of providing a throughput of up to 1 MSPS  
when the clock source is 41.78 MHz. This block provides the user  
with a multichannel multiplexer, differential track-and-hold, on-  
chip reference, and ADC.  
TRANSFER FUNCTION  
Pseudo Differential and Single-Ended Modes  
In pseudo differential or single-ended modes, the input range is  
0 V to VREF. The output coding is straight binary in pseudo  
differential and single-ended modes with  
1 LSB = FS/4096, or  
The ADC consists of a 12-bit successive approximation  
converter based around two capacitor DACs. Depending on the  
input signal configuration, the ADC can operate in one of three  
different modes:  
2.5 V/4096 = 0.61 mV, or  
610 μV when VREF = 2.5 V  
The ideal code transitions occur midway between successive  
integer LSB values (that is, 1/2 LSB, 3/2 LSB, 5/2 LSB, … ,  
FS − 3/2 LSB). The ideal input/output transfer characteristic  
is shown in Figure 37.  
Fully differential mode, for small and balanced signals  
Single-ended mode, for any single-ended signals  
1111 1111 1111  
1111 1111 1110  
1111 1111 1101  
Pseudo differential mode, for any single-ended signals,  
taking advantage of the common-mode rejection offered  
by the pseudo differential input  
1111 1111 1100  
FS  
1LSB =  
4096  
The converter accepts an analog input range of 0 to VREF when  
operating in single-ended mode or pseudo differential mode. In  
fully differential mode, the input signal must be balanced  
0000 0000 0011  
0000 0000 0010  
0000 0000 0001  
0000 0000 0000  
around a common-mode voltage VCM, in the range 0 V to AVDD  
and with a maximum amplitude of 2 VREF (see Figure 36).  
,
AV  
DD  
0V 1LSB  
+FS – 1LSB  
VOLTAGE INPUT  
V
2V  
CM  
REF  
Figure 37. ADC Transfer Function in Pseudo Differential Mode  
or Single-Ended Mode  
V
CM  
2V  
REF  
V
Fully Differential Mode  
2V  
CM  
REF  
0
The amplitude of the differential signal is the difference  
between the signals applied to the VIN+ and VIN– pins (that is,  
Figure 36. Examples of Balanced Signals in Fully Differential Mode  
V
IN+ – VIN–). The maximum amplitude of the differential signal  
A high precision, low drift, and factory calibrated 2.5 V  
reference is provided on-chip. An external reference can also be  
connected as described later in the Band Gap Reference section.  
is therefore –VREF to +VREF p-p (that is, 2 × VREF). This is  
regardless of the common mode (CM). The common mode is  
the average of the two signals, for example, (VIN+ + VIN–)/2, and  
is therefore the voltage that the two inputs are centered on. This  
results in the span of each input being CM ± VREF/2. This  
voltage has to be set up externally and its range varies with VREF  
(see the Driving the Analog Inputs section).  
Single or continuous conversion modes can be initiated in the  
software. An external  
pin, an output generated from  
CONVSTART  
the on-chip PLA, or a Timer0 or Timer1 overflow can also be  
used to generate a repetitive trigger for ADC conversions.  
The output coding is twos complement in fully differential  
mode with 1 LSB = 2 VREF/4096 or 2 × 2.5 V/4096 = 1.22 mV  
when VREF = 2.5 V. The designed code transitions occur midway  
between successive integer LSB values (that is, 1/2 LSB, 3/2 LSB,  
5/2 LSB, … , FS – 3/2 LSB). The ideal input/output transfer  
characteristic is shown in Figure 38.  
A voltage output from an on-chip band gap reference  
proportional to absolute temperature can also be routed  
through the front-end ADC multiplexer, effectively an  
additional ADC channel input. This facilitates an internal  
temperature sensor channel, which measures die temperature to  
an accuracy of ±3°C.  
Rev. A | Page 37 of 92  
 
 
 
ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27  
SIGN  
BIT  
ACQ  
BIT TRIAL  
WRITE  
0
0
0
1111 1111 1110  
1111 1111 1100  
1111 1111 1010  
2 × V  
REF  
4096  
1LSB =  
ADC CLOCK  
0
0
1
0000 0000 0010  
0000 0000 0000  
1111 1111 1110  
CONV  
START  
ADC  
BUSY  
1
1
1
0000 0000 0100  
0000 0000 0010  
0000 0000 0000  
DATA  
ADCDAT  
–V  
+ 1LSB  
0LSB  
+V  
– 1LSB  
REF  
REF  
ADCSTA = 0  
ADCSTA = 1  
ADC INTERRUPT  
VOLTAGE INPUT (V + – V –)  
IN IN  
Figure 38. ADC Transfer Function in Differential Mode  
Figure 40. ADC Timing  
TYPICAL OPERATION  
ADuC7019  
Once configured via the ADC control and channel selection  
registers, the ADC converts the analog input and provides a  
12-bit result in the ADC data register.  
The ADuC7019 is identical to the ADuC7020 except for one  
buffered ADC channel, ADC3, and it has only three DACs. The  
output buffer of the fourth DAC is internally connected to the  
ADC3 channel as shown in Figure 41.  
The top 4 bits are the sign bits. The 12-bit result is placed from  
Bit 16 to Bit 27 as shown in Figure 39. Again, it should be noted  
that in fully differential mode, the result is represented in twos  
complement format, and in pseudo differential and single-  
ended modes, the result is represented in straight binary format.  
ADuC7019  
1MSPS  
12-BIT ADC  
12-BIT  
DAC  
MUX  
ADC3  
DAC3  
31  
27  
16 15  
0
ADC15  
SIGN BITS  
12-BIT ADC RESULT  
Figure 41. ADC3 Buffered Input  
Figure 39. ADC Result Format  
Note that the DAC3 output pin must be connected to a 10 nF  
capacitor to AGND. This channel should be used to measure dc  
voltages only. ADC calibration might be necessary on this  
channel.  
The same format is used in DAC×DAT, simplifying the software.  
Current Consumption  
The ADC in standby mode, that is, powered up but not converting,  
typically consumes 640 μA. The internal reference adds 140 μA.  
During conversion, the extra current is 0.3 μA multiplied by the  
sampling frequency (in kHz). Figure 31 shows the current  
consumption versus the sampling frequency of the ADC.  
MMRS INTERFACE  
The ADC is controlled and configured via the eight MMRs  
described in this section.  
ADCCON Register  
Timing  
Name  
Address  
Default Value  
Access  
Figure 40 gives details of the ADC timing. Users have control on  
the ADC clock speed and on the number of acquisition clocks  
in the ADCCON MMR. By default, the acquisition time is eight  
clocks and the clock divider is two. The number of extra clocks  
(such as bit trial or write) is set to 19, which gives a sampling  
rate of 774 kSPS. For conversion on temperature sensor, the  
ADC acquisition time is automatically set to 16 clocks and the  
ADC clock divider is set to 32.  
ADCCON  
0xFFFF0500  
0x0600  
R/W  
ADCCON is an ADC control register that allows the  
programmer to enable the ADC peripheral, select the mode  
of operation of the ADC (either in single-ended mode, pseudo  
differential mode, or fully differential mode), and select the  
conversion type. This MMR is described in Table 14.  
Rev. A | Page 38 of 92  
 
 
 
 
 
 
ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27  
Table 14. ADCCON MMR Bit Designations  
ADCCP Register  
Name  
Address  
Default Value  
Access  
Bit  
Value Description  
ADCCP  
0xFFFF0504  
0x00  
R/W  
15:13  
12:10  
Reserved.  
ADC clock speed.  
fADC/1. This divider is provided to obtain  
1 MSPS ADC with an external clock <41.78 MHz.  
fADC/2 (default value).  
fADC/4.  
fADC/8.  
fADC/16.  
fADC/32.  
ADCCP is an ADC positive channel selection register. This  
MMR is described in Table 15.  
Table 15. ADCCP1 MMR Bit Designation  
Bit  
7:5  
4:0  
000  
001  
010  
011  
100  
101  
Value  
Description  
Reserved  
Positive channel selection bits  
ADC0  
00000  
00001  
00010  
00011  
00100  
00101  
00110  
00111  
01000  
01001  
01010  
01011  
01100  
01101  
01110  
01111  
10000  
10001  
10010  
10011  
ADC1  
ADC2  
ADC3  
ADC4  
ADC5  
ADC6  
ADC7  
ADC8  
ADC9  
ADC10  
ADC11  
DAC0/ADC12  
DAC1/ADC13  
DAC2/ADC14  
DAC3/ADC15  
9:8  
7
ADC acquisition time.  
2 clocks.  
4 clocks.  
8 clocks (default value).  
16 clocks.  
Enable start conversion.  
Set by the user to start any type of conversion  
command. Cleared by the user to disable a  
start conversion (clearing this bit does not  
stop the ADC when continuously converting).  
Enable ADCBUSY.  
Set by the user to enable the ADCBUSY pin.  
Cleared by the user to disable the ADCBUSY pin.  
ADC power control.  
Set by the user to place the ADC in normal  
mode (the ADC must be powered up for at least  
5 μs before it converts correctly). Cleared by the  
user to place the ADC in power-down mode.  
Conversion mode.  
Single-ended mode.  
Differential mode.  
Pseudo differential mode.  
Reserved.  
00  
01  
10  
11  
6
5
Temperature sensor  
AGND (self-diagnostic feature)  
Internal reference (self-diagnostic feature)  
AVDD/2  
4:3  
2:0  
00  
01  
10  
11  
Others Reserved  
1 ADC and DAC channel availability depends on part model. See the Ordering  
Guide for details.  
Conversion type.  
000  
001  
010  
011  
Enable CONVSTART pin as a conversion input.  
Enable Timer1 as a conversion input.  
Enable Timer0 as a conversion input.  
Single software conversion; sets to 000 after  
conversion (Bit 7 of ADCCON MMR should be  
cleared after starting a single software  
conversion to avoid further conversions  
triggered by the CONVSTART pin).  
100  
101  
Continuous software conversion.  
PLA conversion.  
Other Reserved.  
Rev. A | Page 39 of 92  
 
 
ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27  
ADCRST resets the digital interface of the ADC. Writing any  
value to this register resets all the ADC registers to their default  
value.  
ADCCN Register  
Name  
Address  
Default Value  
Access  
ADCCN  
0xFFFF0508  
0x01  
R/W  
ADCCN is an ADC negative channel selection register. This  
MMR is described in Table 16.  
ADCGN Register  
Name  
Address  
Default Value  
Access  
ADCGN  
0xFFFF0530  
0x0200  
R/W  
Table 16. ADCCN MMR Bit Designation  
Bit  
7:5  
4:0  
Value  
Description  
ADCGN is a 10-bit gain calibration register.  
Reserved  
Negative channel selection bits  
ADC0  
ADC1  
ADC2  
ADC3  
ADC4  
ADC5  
ADC6  
ADC7  
ADC8  
ADC9  
ADC10  
ADC11  
DAC0/ADC12  
DAC1/ADC13  
ADCOF Register  
Name  
Address  
Default Value  
Access  
00000  
00001  
00010  
00011  
00100  
00101  
00110  
00111  
01000  
01001  
01010  
01011  
01100  
01101  
01110  
01111  
10000  
ADCOF  
0xFFFF0534  
0x0200  
R/W  
ADCOF is a 10-bit offset calibration register.  
CONVERTER OPERATION  
The ADC incorporates a successive approximation (SAR)  
architecture involving a charge-sampled input stage. This  
architecture can operate in three different modes: differential,  
pseudo differential, and single-ended.  
Differential Mode  
The ADuC7019/7020/7021/7022/7024/7025/7026/7027 each  
contain a successive approximation ADC based on two  
capacitive DACs. Figure 42 and Figure 43 show simplified  
schematics of the ADC in acquisition and conversion phase,  
respectively. The ADC is comprised of control logic, a SAR, and  
two capacitive DACs. In Figure 42 (the acquisition phase), SW3  
is closed and SW1 and SW2 are in Position A. The comparator  
is held in a balanced condition, and the sampling capacitor  
arrays acquire the differential signal on the input.  
DAC2/ADC14  
DAC3/ADC15  
Internal reference (self-diagnostic feature)  
Others Reserved  
ADCSTA Register  
Name  
Address  
Default Value  
Access  
CAPACITIVE  
DAC  
ADCSTA  
0xFFFF050C  
0x00  
R
COMPARATOR  
C
C
B
A
S
S
CHANNEL+  
CHANNEL–  
ADCSTA is an ADC status register that indicates when an ADC  
conversion result is ready. The ADCSTA register contains only  
one bit, ADCReady (Bit 0), representing the status of the ADC.  
This bit is set at the end of an ADC conversion, generating an  
ADC interrupt. It is cleared automatically by reading the  
ADCDAT MMR. When the ADC is performing a conversion,  
the status of the ADC can be read externally via the ADCBUSY  
pin. This pin is high during a conversion. When the conversion  
is finished, ADCBUSY goes back low. This information can be  
available on P0.5 (see the General-Purpose Input/Output  
section) if enabled in the ADCCON register.  
AIN0  
SW1  
SW2  
CONTROL  
LOGIC  
MUX  
SW3  
A
B
AIN11  
V
REF  
CAPACITIVE  
DAC  
Figure 42. ADC Acquisition Phase  
When the ADC starts a conversion, as shown in Figure 43, SW3  
opens, and then SW1 and SW2 move to Position B. This causes  
the comparator to become unbalanced. Both inputs are discon-  
nected once the conversion begins. The control logic and the  
charge redistribution DACs are used to add and subtract fixed  
amounts of charge from the sampling capacitor arrays to bring  
the comparator back into a balanced condition. When the  
comparator is rebalanced, the conversion is complete. The  
control logic generates the ADCs output code. The output  
impedances of the sources driving the VIN+ and VIN– pins must  
be matched; otherwise, the two inputs have different settling  
times, resulting in errors.  
ADCDAT Register  
Name  
ADCDAT  
Address  
Default Value  
Access  
0xFFFF0510  
0x00000000  
R
ADCDAT is an ADC data result register. Hold the 12-bit ADC  
result as shown in Figure 39.  
ADCRST Register  
Name  
Address  
Default Value  
Access  
ADCRST  
0xFFFF0514  
0x00  
R/W  
Rev. A | Page 40 of 92  
 
 
 
ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27  
The capacitors, C1, in Figure 46 are typically 4 pF and can be  
primarily attributed to pin capacitance. The resistors are  
lumped components made up of the ON resistance of the  
switches. The value of these resistors is typically about 100 Ω.  
The capacitors, C2, are the ADC’s sampling capacitors and  
typically have a capacitance of 16 pF.  
CAPACITIVE  
DAC  
COMPARATOR  
C
C
B
A
S
S
CHANNEL+  
CHANNEL–  
AIN0  
SW1  
SW2  
CONTROL  
LOGIC  
MUX  
SW3  
A
B
AIN11  
AV  
DD  
V
REF  
CAPACITIVE  
DAC  
D
C2  
R1  
Figure 43. ADC Conversion Phase  
C1  
D
Pseudo Differential Mode  
In pseudo differential mode, Channel− is linked to the VIN− pin  
of the ADuC7019/7020/7021/7022/7024/7025/7026/7027. SW2  
switches between A (Channel−) and B (VREF). VIN− pin must be  
connected to ground or a low voltage. The input signal on VIN+  
can then vary from VIN− to VREF + VIN−. Note that VIN− must be  
AV  
DD  
D
D
C2  
R1  
C1  
chosen so that VREF + VIN− do not exceed AVDD  
.
CAPACITIVE  
DAC  
Figure 46. Equivalent Analog Input Circuit Conversion Phase:  
Switches Open; Track Phase: Switches Closed  
COMPARATOR  
C
C
B
A
S
S
CHANNEL+  
AIN0  
For ac applications, removing high frequency components  
from the analog input signal is recommended by using an RC  
low-pass filter on the relevant analog input pins. In applications  
where harmonic distortion and signal-to-noise ratio are critical,  
the analog input should be driven from a low impedance  
source. Large source impedances significantly affect the ac  
performance of the ADC. This can necessitate the use of an  
input buffer amplifier. The choice of the op amp is a function of  
the particular application. Figure 47 and Figure 48 give an  
example of ADC front end.  
SW1  
SW2  
CONTROL  
LOGIC  
MUX  
SW3  
A
B
AIN11  
VIN–  
V
REF  
CAPACITIVE  
DAC  
CHANNEL–  
Figure 44. ADC in Pseudo Differential Mode  
Single-Ended Mode  
In single-ended mode, SW2 is always connected internally to  
ground. The VIN− pin can be floating. The input signal range on  
VIN+ is 0 V to VREF.  
ADuC702x  
CAPACITIVE  
DAC  
10Ω  
ADC0  
0.01μF  
COMPARATOR  
C
C
B
A
S
S
CHANNEL+  
AIN0  
SW1  
CONTROL  
LOGIC  
Figure 47. Buffering Single-Ended/Pseudo Differential Input  
MUX  
SW3  
CHANNEL–  
AIN11  
ADuC702x  
ADC0  
CAPACITIVE  
DAC  
V
REF  
ADC1  
Figure 45. ADC in Single-Ended Mode  
Analog Input Structure  
Figure 48. Buffering Differential Inputs  
Figure 46 shows the equivalent circuit of the analog input structure  
of the ADC. The four diodes provide ESD protection for the analog  
inputs. Care must be taken to ensure that the analog input  
signals never exceed the supply rails by more than 300 mV; this  
would cause these diodes to become forward biased and start  
conducting into the substrate. These diodes can conduct up to  
10 mA without causing irreversible damage to the part.  
When no amplifier is used to drive the analog input, the source  
impedance should be limited to values lower than 1 kΩ. The  
maximum source impedance depends on the amount of total  
harmonic distortion (THD) that can be tolerated. The THD  
increases as the source impedance increases and the  
performance degrades.  
Rev. A | Page 41 of 92  
 
 
 
 
ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27  
DRIVING THE ANALOG INPUTS  
TEMPERATURE SENSOR  
Internal or external reference can be used for the ADC. In  
differential mode of operation, there are restrictions on  
common-mode input signal (VCM), which is dependent on the  
reference value and supply voltage used to ensure that the signal  
remains within the supply rails. Table 17 gives some calculated  
The ADuC7019/7020/7021/7022/7024/7025/7026/7027 provide  
voltage output from on-chip band gap references proportional  
to absolute temperature. This voltage output can also be routed  
through the front-end ADC multiplexer (effectively an  
additional ADC channel input) facilitating an internal  
temperature sensor channel, measuring die temperature to an  
accuracy of ±3°C.  
VCM min and VCM max for some conditions.  
Table 17. VCM Ranges  
AVDD VREF  
VCM Min VCM Max Signal Peak-to-Peak  
BAND GAP REFERENCE  
3.3 V 2.5 V  
1.25 V  
2.05 V  
2.276 V  
2.55 V  
1.75 V  
1.976 V  
2.25 V  
2.5 V  
Each ADuC7019/7020/7021/7022/7024/7025/7026/7027  
provides an on-chip band gap reference of 2.5 V, which can be  
used for the ADC and DAC. This internal reference also  
appears on the VREF pin. When using the internal reference, a  
0.47 μF capacitor must be connected from the external VREF pin  
to AGND to ensure stability and fast response during ADC  
conversions. This reference can also be connected to an external  
pin (VREF) and used as a reference for other circuits in the  
system. An external buffer is required because of the low drive  
capability of the VREF output. A programmable option also  
allows an external reference input on the VREF pin.  
2.048 V 1.024 V  
1.25 V  
2.048 V  
1.25 V  
2.5 V  
2.048 V  
1.25 V  
0.75 V  
1.25 V  
3.0 V 2.5 V  
2.048 V 1.024 V  
1.25 V  
0.75 V  
CALIBRATION  
By default, the factory set values written to the ADC offset  
(ADCOF) and gain coefficient registers (ADCGN) yield  
optimum performance in terms of end-point errors and  
linearity for standalone operation of the part. (See the  
Specifications section.) If system calibration is required, it is  
possible to modify the default offset and gain coefficients to  
improve end-point errors, but note that any modification to the  
factory set ADCOF and ADCGN values can degrade ADC  
linearity performance.  
REFCON Register  
Name  
Address  
Default Value  
Access  
REFCON  
0xFFFF048C  
0x00  
R/W  
The band gap reference interface consists of an 8-bit MMR  
REFCON described in Table 18.  
For system offset error correction, the ADC channel input stage  
must be tied to AGND. A continuous software ADC conversion  
loop must be implemented by modifying the value in ADCOF  
until the ADC result (ADCDAT) reads code 0 to 1. Offset error  
correction is done digitally and has a resolution of 0.25 LSB and  
Table 18. REFCON MMR Bit Designations  
Bit  
7:2  
1
Description  
Reserved.  
Internal Reference Power-Down Enable. Set by user to  
place the internal reference in power-down mode and  
use as an external reference. Cleared by user to place  
the internal reference in normal mode and use it for  
ADC conversions.  
a range of 3.125ꢀ of VREF  
.
For system gain error correction, the ADC channel input stage  
must be tied to VREF. A continuous software ADC conversion  
loop must be implemented to modify the value in ADCOF until  
the ADC result (ADCDAT) reads code 4094 to 4095. Similar to  
the offset calibration, the gain calibration resolution is 0.25 LSB  
0
Internal Reference Output Enable. Set by user to  
connect the internal 2.5 V reference to the VREF pin. The  
reference can be used for external component but  
needs to be buffered. Cleared by user to disconnect  
the reference from the VREF pin.  
with a range of 3ꢀ of VREF  
.
Rev. A | Page 42 of 92  
 
 
 
ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27  
NONVOLATILE FLASH/EE MEMORY  
The ADuC7019/7020/7021/7022/7024/7025/7026/7027  
incorporate Flash/EE memory technology on-chip to provide  
the user with nonvolatile, in-circuit reprogrammable memory  
space.  
Retention quantifies the ability of the Flash/EE memory to  
retain its programmed data over time. Again, the parts is  
qualified in accordance with the formal JEDEC Retention  
Lifetime Specification (A117) at a specific junction temperature  
(T  
= 85°C). As part of this qualification procedure, the  
J
Like EEPROM, flash memory can be programmed in-system at  
a byte level, although it must first be erased. The erase is  
performed in page blocks. As a result, flash memory is often  
and more correctly referred to as Flash/EE memory.  
Flash/EE memory is cycled to its specified endurance limit,  
described previously, before data retention is characterized.  
This means that the Flash/EE memory is guaranteed to retain  
its data for its fully specified retention lifetime every time the  
Flash/EE memory is reprogrammed. Also note that retention  
lifetime, based on an activation energy of 0.6 eV, derates with T  
as shown in Figure 49.  
Overall, Flash/EE memory represents a step closer to the ideal  
memory device that includes nonvolatility, in-circuit  
programmability, high density, and low cost. Incorporated in  
the ADuC7019/7020/7021/7022/7024/7025/7026/7027,  
Flash/EE memory technology allows the user to update  
program code space in-circuit, without the need to replace one  
time programmable (OTP) devices at remote operating nodes.  
J
600  
450  
300  
150  
0
Each ADuC7019/7020/7021/7022/7024/7025/7026/7027  
contains a 64 kB array of Flash/EE memory. The lower 62 kB is  
available to the user and the upper 2 kB contain permanently  
embedded firmware, allowing in-circuit serial download. These  
2 kB of embedded firmware also contain a power-on  
configuration routine that downloads factory calibrated  
coefficients to the various calibrated peripherals (such as ADC,  
temperature sensor, and band gap references). This 2 kB  
embedded firmware is hidden from user code.  
30  
40  
55  
70  
85  
100  
125  
135  
150  
JUNCTION TEMPERATURE (°C)  
Figure 49. Flash/EE Memory Data Retention  
Flash/EE Memory Reliability  
The Flash/EE memory arrays on the parts is fully qualified for  
two key Flash/EE memory characteristics: Flash/EE memory  
cycling endurance and Flash/EE memory data retention.  
PROGRAMMING  
The 62 kB of Flash/EE memory can be programmed in-circuit,  
using the serial download mode or the JTAG mode provided.  
Endurance quantifies the ability of the Flash/EE memory to be  
cycled through many program, read, and erase cycles. A single  
endurance cycle is composed of four independent, sequential  
events, defined as:  
Serial Downloading (In-Circuit Programming)  
The ADuC7019/7020/7021/7022/7024/7025/7026/7027  
facilitate code download via the standard UART serial port or  
via the I2C port. The parts enter serial download mode after a  
reset or power cycle if the BM pin is pulled low through an  
external 1 kΩ resistor. Once in serial download mode, the user  
can download code to the full 62 kB of Flash/EE memory while  
the device is in-circuit in its target application hardware. An  
executable PC serial download is provided as part of the  
development system for serial downloading via the UART. An  
1. Initial page erase sequence.  
2. Read/verify sequence a single Flash/EE.  
3. Byte program sequence memory.  
4. Second read/verify sequence endurance cycle.  
application note is available at www.analog.com/microconverter  
describing the protocol for serial downloading via the UART  
and I2C.  
In reliability qualification, every half word (16-bit wide)  
location of the three pages (top, middle, and bottom) in the  
Flash/EE memory is cycled 10,000 times from 0x0000 to  
0xFFFF. As indicated in Table 1, the parts’ Flash/EE memory  
endurance qualification is carried out in accordance with  
JEDEC Retention Lifetime Specification A117 over the  
industrial temperature range of --40°C to +25°C and +25°C to  
+125°C. The results allow the specification of a minimum  
endurance figure over supply temperature of 10,000 cycles.  
JTAG Access  
The JTAG protocol uses the on-chip JTAG interface to facilitate  
code download and debug. An application note is available at  
www.analog.com/microconverter describing the protocol via  
JTAG.  
Rev. A | Page 43 of 92  
 
 
ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27  
It is possible to write to a single Flash/EE location address  
twice. If a single address is written to more than twice, then the  
data within the Flash/EE memory can be corrupted. That is, it is  
possible to walk zeros only byte wise.  
FLASH/EE CONTROL INTERFACE  
Serial, parallel, and JTAG programming use the Flash/EE control  
interface, which includes eight MMRs outlined in this section.  
FEESTA Register  
SECURITY  
Name  
Address  
Default Value  
Access  
The 62 kB of Flash/EE memory available to the user can be read  
and write protected.  
FEESTA  
0xFFFFF800  
0x20  
R
FEESTA is a read-only register that reflects the status of the  
flash control interface as described in Table 19.  
Bit 31 of the FEEPRO/FEEHIDE MMR (see Table 22) protects  
the 62 kB from being read through JTAG and also in parallel  
programming mode. The other 31 bits of this register protect  
writing to the flash memory. Each bit protects four pages, that  
is, 2 kB. Write protection is activated for all types of access.  
Table 19. FEESTA MMR Bit Designations  
Bit  
15:6  
5
Description  
Reserved.  
Burst Command Enable. Set when the command is a  
burst command: 0x07, 0x08, or 0x09. Cleared when  
another command.  
Three Levels of Protection  
Protection can be set and removed by writing directly into  
FEEHIDE MMR. This protection does not remain after reset.  
Protection can be set by writing into FEEPRO MMR. It  
only takes effect after a save protection command (0×0C)  
and a reset. The FEEPRO MMR is protected by a key to  
avoid direct access. The key is saved once and must be  
entered again to modify FEEPRO. A mass erase sets the  
key back to 0×FFFF but also erases all the user code.  
Flash can be permanently protected by using the FEEPRO  
MMR and a particular value of key: 0×DEADDEAD.  
Entering the key again to modify the FEEPRO register is  
not allowed.  
4
3
Reserved.  
Flash Interrupt Status Bit. Set automatically when an  
interrupt occurs, that is, when a command is complete  
and the Flash/EE interrupt enable bit in the FEEMOD  
register is set. Cleared when reading FEESTA register.  
Flash/EE Controller Busy. Set automatically when the  
controller is busy. Cleared automatically when the  
controller is not busy.  
Command Fail. Set automatically when a command  
completes unsuccessfully. Cleared automatically when  
reading FEESTA register.  
Command Pass. Set by MicroConverter when a  
command completes successfully. Cleared  
automatically when reading FEESTA register.  
2
1
0
Sequence to Write the Key  
1. Write the bit in FEEPRO corresponding to the page to be  
protected.  
2. Enable key protection by setting Bit 6 of FEEMOD (Bit 5  
must equal 0).  
FEEMOD Register  
Name  
Address  
Default Value  
Access  
FEEMOD  
0xFFFFF804  
0x0000  
R/W  
FEEMOD sets the operating mode of the flash control interface.  
Table 20 shows FEEMOD MMR bit designations.  
3. Write a 32-bit key in FEEADR, FEEDAT.  
4. Run the write key command 0×0C in FEECON; wait for  
the read to be successful by monitoring FEESTA.  
Table 20. FEEMOD MMR Bit Designations  
Bit  
15:9  
8
Description  
5. Reset the part.  
Reserved.  
To remove or modify the protection, the same sequence is used  
with a modified value of FEEPRO. If the key chosen is the value  
0×DEAD, then the memory protection cannot be removed. Only a  
mass erase unprotects the part, but it also erases all user code.  
Reserved. This bit should always be set to 0.  
7:5  
Reserved. These bits should always be set to 0 except  
when writing keys. See the Sequence to Write the Key  
section.  
4
Flash/EE Interrupt Enable. Set by user to enable the  
Flash/EE interrupt. The interrupt occurs when a  
command is complete. Cleared by user to disable  
the Flash/EE interrupt.  
Erase/Write Command Protection. Set by user to  
enable the erase and write commands. Cleared to  
protect the Flash against erase/write command.  
The sequence to write the key is illustrated in the following  
example (this protects writing Pages 4 to 7 of the Flash):  
FEEPRO=0xFFFFFFFD;  
FEEMOD=0x48;  
//Protect pages 4 to 7  
//Write key enable  
//16 bit key value  
//16 bit key value  
// Write key command  
3
FEEADR=0x1234;  
FEEDAT=0x5678;  
FEECON= 0x0C;  
2:0  
Reserved. These bits should always be set to 0.  
The same sequence should be followed to protect the part  
permanently with FEEADR = 0×DEAD and FEEDAT =  
0×DEAD.  
FEECON Register  
Name  
Address  
Default Value  
Access  
FEECON  
0xFFFFF808  
0x07  
R/W  
Rev. A | Page 44 of 92  
 
 
 
 
ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27  
FEECON is an 8-bit command register. The commands are  
described in Table 21.  
FEEDAT Register  
Name  
Address  
Default Value  
Access  
FEEDAT  
0xFFFFF80C  
0xXXXX  
R/W  
Table 21. Command Codes in FEECON  
Code Command  
0x001 Null  
0x011 Single Read  
Description  
FEEDAT is a 16-bit data register.  
Idle State.  
Load FEEDAT with the 16-bit data.  
Indexed by FEEADR.  
FEEADR Register  
Name  
Address  
Default Value  
Access  
0x021 Single Write  
0x031 Erase/Write  
Write FEEDAT at the address pointed by  
FEEADR. This operation takes 20 μs.  
Erase the page indexed by FEEADR and  
write FEEDAT at the location pointed by  
FEEADR. This operation takes 20 ms.  
FEEADR  
0xFFFFF810  
0x0000  
R/W  
FEEADR is another 16-bit address register.  
FEESIGN Register  
Name  
Address  
Default Value  
Access  
0x041 Single Verify Compare the contents of the location  
pointed by FEEADR to the data in  
FEESIGN  
0xFFFFF818  
0xFFFFFF  
R
FEEDAT. The result of the comparison is  
returned in FEESTA Bit 1.  
Erase the page indexed by FEEADR.  
Erase 62 kB of user space. The 2 kB of  
kernel are protected. This operation  
takes 2.48 seconds. To prevent accidental  
execution, a command sequence is  
required to execute this instruction. See  
the Command Sequence for Executing a  
Mass Erase section.  
FEESIGN is a 24-bit code signature.  
0x051 Single Erase  
0x061 Mass Erase  
FEEPRO Register  
Name  
Address  
Default Value  
Access  
FEEPRO  
0xFFFFF81C  
0x00000000  
R/W  
FEEPRO MMR provides immediate protection. It does not  
require any software keys, see Table 22.  
FEEHIDE Register  
Name  
Address  
Default Value  
Access  
0x07  
0x08  
0x09  
Burst Read  
Default Command. No write is allowed.  
This operation takes two cycles.  
Write can handle a maximum of 8 data of  
FEEHIDE  
0xFFFFF820  
0xFFFFFFFF  
R/W  
Burst  
Read/Write  
FEEHIDE provides protection following subsequent reset of the  
MMR. It requires a software key. See description in Table 22.  
16 bits and takes a maximum of 8 x 20 μs.  
Erase Burst  
Read/Write  
Automatically erases the page indexed by  
the write; writes pages without running  
an erase command. This command takes  
20 ms to erase the page + 20 μs per data  
to write.  
Table 22. FEEPRO and FEEHIDE MMR Bit Designations  
Bit  
Description  
31  
Read Protection. Cleared by user to protect all code.  
Set by user to allow reading the code.  
0x0A Reserved  
0x0B Signature  
Reserved.  
30:0  
Write Protection for Pages 123 to 120, Pages 119 to 116,  
and Pages 0 to 3. Cleared by user to protect the pages in  
writing. Set by user to allow writing the pages.  
Give a signature of the 64 kB of Flash/EE  
in the 24-bit FEESIGN MMR. This  
operation takes 32,778 clock cycles.  
Command Sequence for Executing a Mass Erase  
0x0C Protect  
This command can run only once. The  
value of FEEPRO is saved and removed  
only with a mass erase (0x06) or the key.  
Reserved.  
Reserved.  
FEEDAT=0x3CFF;  
FEEADR = 0xFFC3;  
FEEMOD= FEEMOD|0x8; //Erase key enable  
0x0D Reserved  
FEECON=0x06;  
//Mass erase command  
0x0E  
0x0F  
Reserved  
Ping  
No operation; interrupt generated.  
1 The FEECON register always reads 0x07 immediately after execution of any  
of these commands.  
Rev. A | Page 45 of 92  
 
 
 
 
 
 
ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27  
EXECUTION TIME FROM SRAM AND FLASH/EE  
RESET AND REMAP  
Execution from SRAM  
The ARM exception vectors are all situated at the bottom of the  
memory array, from address 0x00000000 to address  
0x00000020 as shown in Figure 50.  
Fetching instructions from SRAM takes one clock cycle as the  
access time of the SRAM is 2 ns and a clock cycle is 22 ns  
minimum. However, if the instruction involves reading or  
writing data to memory, one extra cycle must be added if the  
data is in SRAM (or three cycles if the data is in Flash/EE). One  
cycle to execute the instruction, and two cycles to get the 32-bit  
data from Flash/EE. A control flow instruction (a branch  
instruction, for example) takes one cycle to fetch but also takes  
two cycles to fill the pipeline with the new instructions.  
0xFFFFFFFF  
KERNEL  
0x0008FFFF  
0x00011FFF  
FLASH/EE  
INTERRUPT  
SERVICE ROUTINES  
0x00080000  
0x00010000  
Execution from Flash/EE  
Because the Flash/EE width is 16 bits and access time for 16-bit  
words is 22 ns, execution from Flash/EE cannot be done in  
one cycle (as can be done from SRAM when CD Bit = 0). Also,  
some dead times are needed before accessing data for any value  
of CD bits.  
SRAM  
INTERRUPT  
SERVICE ROUTINES  
MIRROR SPACE  
0x00000020  
ARM EXCEPTION  
In ARM mode, where instructions are 32 bits, two cycles are  
needed to fetch any instruction when CD = 0. In thumb mode,  
where instructions are 16 bits, one cycle is needed to fetch any  
instruction.  
VECTOR ADDRESSES 0x00000000 0x00000000  
Figure 50. Remap for Exception Execution  
By default, and after any reset, the Flash/EE is mirrored at the  
bottom of the memory array. The remap function allows the  
programmer to mirror the SRAM at the bottom of the memory  
array, which facilitates execution of exception routines from SRAM  
instead of from Flash/EE. This means exceptions are executed twice  
as fast, being executed in 32-bit ARM mode, and the SRAM being  
32-bit wide instead of 16-bit wide Flash/EE memory.  
Timing is identical in both modes when executing instructions  
that involve using the Flash/EE for data memory. If the  
instruction to be executed is a control flow instruction, an extra  
cycle is needed to decode the new address of the program  
counter and then four cycles are needed to fill the pipeline. A  
data-processing instruction involving only the core register  
does not require any extra clock cycle. However, if it involves  
data in Flash/EE, an extra clock cycle is needed to decode the  
address of the data, and two cycles are needed to get the 32-bit  
data from Flash/EE. An extra cycle must also be added before  
fetching another instruction. Data transfer instructions are  
more complex and are summarized in Table 23.  
Remap Operation  
When a reset occurs on the ADuC7019/7020/7021/7022/  
7024/7025/7026/7027, execution starts automatically in factory  
programmed internal configuration code. This kernel is hidden  
and cannot be accessed by user code. If the ADuC7019/7020/  
7021/7022/7024/7025/7026/7027 are in normal mode (BM pin  
is high), then they execute the power-on configuration routine  
of the kernel and then jump to the reset vector address,  
0x00000000, to execute the users reset exception routine.  
Table 23. Execution Cycles in ARM/Thumb Mode  
Fetch  
Instructions Cycles  
Dead  
Time  
Dead  
Time  
Data Access  
LD1  
LDH  
LDM/PUSH  
STR1  
2/1  
2/1  
2/1  
2/1  
2/1  
2/1  
1
1
N2  
1
2
1
1
1
N1  
1
Because the Flash/EE is mirrored at the bottom of the memory  
array at reset, the reset interrupt routine must always be written  
in Flash/EE.  
2 x N2  
2 x 20 μs  
20 μs  
2 x N x 20 μs1  
STRH  
1
N1  
1
N1  
The remap is done from Flash/EE by setting Bit 0 of the  
REMAP register. Precaution must be taken to execute this  
command from Flash/EE, above address 0x00080020, and not  
from the bottom of the array as this is replaced by the SRAM.  
STRM/POP  
1 The SWAP instruction combines an LD and STR instruction with only one  
fetch, giving a total of eight cycles plus 40 μs.  
2 N is the number of data to load or store in the multiple load/store instruction  
(1 <N ≤ 16).  
This operation is reversible. The Flash/EE can be remapped at  
address 0x00000000 by clearing Bit 0 of the REMAP MMR.  
Precaution must again be taken to execute the remap function  
from outside the mirrored area. Any type of reset remaps the  
Flash/EE memory at the bottom of the array.  
Rev. A | Page 46 of 92  
 
 
 
 
ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27  
Reset Operation  
RSTSTA Register  
Name  
Address  
Default Value  
Access  
There are four kinds of reset: external, power-on, watchdog  
expiation, and software force. The RSTSTA register indicates  
the source of the last reset, and RSTCLR allows clearing the  
RSTSTA register. These registers can be used during a reset  
exception service routine to identify the source of the reset.  
If RSTSTA is null, the reset is external.  
RSTSTA  
0xFFFF0230  
0x01  
R/W  
Table 25. RSTSTA MMR Bit Designations  
Bit  
7:3  
2
Description  
Reserved.  
Software Reset. Set by user to force a software reset.  
Cleared by setting the corresponding bit in RSTCLR.  
Watchdog Timeout. Set automatically when a  
watchdog timeout occurs. Cleared by setting the  
corresponding bit in RSTCLR.  
Power-On Reset. Set automatically when a power-on  
reset occurs. Cleared by setting the corresponding bit in  
RSTCLR.  
REMAP Register  
Name  
Address  
Default Value  
0xXX1  
Access  
1
0
REMAP  
0xFFFF0220  
R/W  
1 Depends on model.  
Table 24. REMAP MMR Bit Designations  
Bit  
Name  
Description  
4
Read-Only Bit. Indicates the size of the  
Flash/EE memory available. If this bit is set,  
only 32 kB of Flash/EE memory is available.  
RSTCLR Register  
Name  
Address  
Default Value  
Access  
3
Read-Only Bit. Indicates the size of the SRAM  
memory available. If this bit is set, only 4 kB of  
SRAM is available.  
RSTCLR  
0xFFFF0234  
0x00  
R/W  
2:1  
0
Reserved.  
Remap Remap Bit. Set by user to remap the SRAM to  
address 0x00000000. Cleared automatically  
after reset to remap the Flash/EE memory to  
address 0x00000000.  
Rev. A | Page 47 of 92  
 
 
ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27  
OTHER ANALOG PERIPHERALS  
DACxDAT Registers  
DAC  
Name  
Address  
Default Value  
0x00000000  
0x00000000  
0x00000000  
0x00000000  
Access  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
The ADuC7019/7020/7021/7022/7024/7025/7026/7027  
incorporate two, three, or four 12-bit voltage output DACs on-  
chip depending on the model. Each DAC has a rail-to-rail voltage  
output buffer capable of driving 5 kΩ/100 pF.  
DAC0DAT  
DAC1DAT  
DAC2DAT  
DAC3DAT  
0xFFFF0604  
0xFFFF060C  
0xFFFF0614  
0xFFFF061C  
Each DAC has three selectable ranges: 0 V to VREF (internal  
band gap 2.5 V reference), 0 V to DACREF, and 0 V to AVDD  
DACREF is equivalent to an external reference for the DAC.  
.
Table 27. DAC0DAT MMR Bit Designations  
Bit  
Description  
The signal range is 0 V to AVDD  
.
31:28  
27:16  
15:0  
Reserved  
12-bit data for DAC0  
Reserved  
MMRs Interface  
Each DAC is configurable independently through a control  
register and a data register. These two registers are identical for  
the four DACs. Only DAC0CON (see Table 26) and DAC0DAT  
(see Table 27) are described in detail in this section.  
Using the DACs  
The on-chip DAC architecture consists of a resistor string DAC  
followed by an output buffer amplifier, the functional  
equivalent of which is shown in Figure 51.  
DACxCON Registers  
Name  
Address  
Default Value  
0x00  
0x00  
0x00  
0x00  
Access  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
DAC0CON  
DAC1CON  
DAC2CON  
DAC3CON  
0xFFFF0600  
0xFFFF0608  
0xFFFF0610  
0xFFFF0618  
AV  
OUTPUT  
BUFFER  
BYPASSED  
FROM MCU  
DD  
REF  
REF  
V
DAC  
R
R
R
DAC0  
Table 26. DAC0CON MMR Bit Designations  
Bit  
Value Name  
Description  
6
Reserved.  
5
DACCLK DAC Update Rate. Set by user to  
update the DAC using Timer1.  
Cleared by user to update the DAC  
using HCLK (core clock).  
R
R
4
DACCLR DAC Clear Bit. Set by user to enable  
normal DAC operation. Cleared by  
user to reset data register of the DAC  
to zero.  
Figure 51. DAC Structure  
As illustrated in Figure 51, the reference source for each DAC is  
user selectable in software. It can be either AVDD, VREF, or DACREF  
In 0-to-AVDD mode, the DAC output transfer function spans  
from 0 V to the voltage at the AVDD pin. In 0-to-DACREF mode,  
the DAC output transfer function spans from 0 V to the voltage at  
the DACREF pin. In 0-to-VREF mode, the DAC output transfer  
3
2
1:0  
Reserved. This bit should be left at 0.  
Reserved. This bit should be left at 0.  
DAC Range Bits.  
Power-Down Mode. The DAC output  
is in tri-state.  
0 − DACREF Range.  
0 − VREF (2.5 V) Range.  
0 − AVDD Range.  
.
00  
01  
10  
11  
function spans from 0 V to the internal 2.5 V reference, VREF  
.
The DAC output buffer amplifier features a true rail-to-rail  
output stage implementation. This means that, unloaded, each  
output is capable of swinging to within less than 5 mV of both  
AVDD and ground. Moreover, the DAC’s linearity specification  
(when driving a 5 kꢁ resistive load to ground) is guaranteed  
through the full transfer function except codes 0 to 100, and, in  
0-to-AVDD mode only, codes 3995 to 4095.  
Rev. A | Page 48 of 92  
 
 
 
 
ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27  
Linearity degradation near ground and VDD is caused by  
POWER SUPPLY MONITOR  
saturation of the output amplifier, and a general representation  
of its effects (neglecting offset and gain error) is illustrated in  
Figure 52. The dotted line in Figure 52 indicates the ideal transfer  
function, and the solid line represents what the transfer function  
might look like with endpoint nonlinearities due to saturation of  
the output amplifier. Note that Figure 52 represents a transfer  
function in 0-to-AVDD mode only. In 0-to-VREF or 0-to-DACREF  
modes (with VREF < AVDD or DACREF < AVDD), the lower non-  
linearity is similar. However, the upper portion of the transfer  
function follows the “ideal” line right to the end (VREF in this case,  
not AVDD), showing no signs of endpoint linearity errors.  
The power supply monitor regulates the IOVDD supply on the  
ADuC7019/7020/7021/7022/7024/7025/7026/7027. It indicates  
when the IOVDD supply pin drops below one of two supply trip  
points. The monitor function is controlled via the PSMCON  
register. If enabled in the IRQEN or FIQEN register, then the  
monitor interrupts the core using the PSMI bit in the PSMCON  
MMR. This bit is immediately cleared once CMP goes high.  
This monitor function allows the user to save working registers  
to avoid possible data loss due to the low supply or brown-out  
conditions. It also ensures that normal code execution does not  
resume until a safe supply level has been established.  
AV  
DD  
PSMCON Register  
AV – 100mV  
DD  
Name  
Address  
Default Value  
Access  
PSMCON  
0xFFFF0440  
0x0008  
R/W  
Table 28. PSMCON MMR Bit Descriptions  
Bit Name Description  
3
CMP  
Comparator Bit. This is a read-only bit and  
directly reflects the state of the comparator.  
Read 1 indicates that the IOVDD supply is above  
its selected trip point or the PSM is in power-  
down mode. Read 0 indicates the IOVDD supply is  
below its selected trip point. This bit should be  
set before leaving the interrupt service routine.  
100mV  
0x00000000  
0x0FFF0000  
Figure 52. Endpoint Nonlinearities Due to Amplifier Saturation  
2
1
TP  
Trip Point Selection Bits. 0 = 2.79 V, 1 = 3.07 V.  
PSMEN Power Supply Monitor Enable Bit. Set to 1 to  
enable the power supply monitor circuit. Clear to  
0 to disable the power supply monitor circuit.  
The endpoint nonlinearities conceptually illustrated in  
Figure 52 get worse as a function of output loading. Most of  
the ADuC7019/7020/7021/7022/7024/7025/7026/7027s data  
sheet specifications assume a 5 kΩ resistive load to ground at  
the DAC output. As the output is forced to source or sink more  
current, the nonlinear regions at the top or bottom  
0
PSMI  
Power Supply Monitor Interrupt Bit. This bit is set  
high by the MicroConverter once when CMP  
goes low, indicating low I/O supply. The PSMI bit  
can be used to interrupt the processor. Once  
CMP returns high, the PSMI bit can be cleared by  
writing a 1 to this location. A 0 write has no  
effect. There is no timeout delay; PSMI can be  
immediately cleared once CMP goes high.  
(respectively) of Figure 52 become larger. With larger current  
demands, this can significantly limit output voltage swing.  
Rev. A | Page 49 of 92  
 
 
 
 
ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27  
Table 29. CMPCON MMR Bit Descriptions  
COMPARATOR  
Bit  
Value Name  
Description  
The ADuC7019/7020/7021/7022/7024/7025/7026/7027  
integrate voltage comparators. The positive input is multiplexed  
with ADC2 and the negative input has two options: ADC3 or  
DAC0. The output of the comparator can be configured to  
generate a system interrupt, can be routed directly to the  
programmable logic array, can start an ADC conversion, or can  
be on an external pin, CMPOUT, as shown in Figure 53.  
15:11  
10  
Reserved.  
CMPEN  
Comparator Enable Bit. Set by user  
to enable the comparator. Cleared  
by user to disable the comparator.  
Comparator Negative Input Select  
Bits.  
9:8  
7:6  
5
CMPIN  
00  
01  
10  
11  
AVDD/2.  
ADC3 input.  
DAC0 output.  
Reserved.  
Comparator Output Configuration  
Bits.  
Reserved.  
Reserved.  
Output on CMPOUT  
IRQ.  
Comparator Output Logic State Bit.  
When low, the comparator output is  
high if the positive input (CMP0) is  
above the negative input (CMP1).  
When high, the comparator output  
is high if the positive input is below  
the negative input.  
IRQ  
ADC2/CMP0  
MUX  
CMPOC  
ADC3/CMP1  
MUX  
DAC0  
00  
01  
10  
11  
P0.0/CMP  
OUT  
.
Figure 53. Comparator  
CMPOL  
Hysteresis  
Figure 54 shows how the input offset voltage and hysteresis  
terms are defined. Input offset voltage (VOS) is the difference  
between the center of the hysteresis range and the ground level.  
This can either be positive or negative. The hysteresis voltage  
(VH) is ½ the width of the hysteresis range.  
4:3  
CMPRES  
00  
Response Time.  
5 μs response time typical for large  
signals (2.5 V differential).  
COMP  
OUT  
V
V
H
H
17 μs response time typical for small  
signals (0.65 mV differential).  
11  
3 μs typical.  
2
1
CMPHYST Comparator Hysteresis Bit. Set by  
user to have a hysteresis of about  
7.5 mV. Cleared by user to have no  
hysteresis.  
COMP0  
V
OS  
Figure 54. Comparator Hysteresis Transfer Function  
Comparator Interface  
CMPORI  
Comparator Output Rising Edge  
Interrupt. Set automatically when a  
rising edge occurs on the moni-  
tored voltage (CMP0). Cleared by  
user by writing a 1 to this bit.  
The comparator interface consists of a 16-bit MMR, CMPCON,  
which is described in Table 29.  
CMPCON Register  
Name  
CMPCON  
0
CMPOFI  
Comparator Output Falling Edge  
Interrupt. Set automatically when a  
falling edge occurs on the monitored  
voltage (CMP0). Cleared by user.  
Address  
Default Value  
Access  
0xFFFF0444  
0x0000  
R/W  
Rev. A | Page 50 of 92  
 
 
 
 
ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27  
External Crystal Selection  
OSCILLATOR AND PLL—POWER CONTROL  
Clocking System  
To switch to external crystal, clear the OSEL bit in the  
PLLCON MMR (see Table 32). In noisy environments, noise  
might couple to the external crystal pins and PLL could lose  
lock momentarily. A PLL interrupt is provided in the interrupt  
controller. The core clock is halted immediately and this  
interrupt is only serviced once the lock has been restored.  
Each ADuC7019/7020/7021/7022/7024/7025/7026/7027  
integrates a 32.768 kHz ±3ꢀ oscillator, a clock divider, and a  
PLL. The PLL locks onto a multiple (1275) of the internal  
oscillator or an external 32.768 kHz crystal to provide a stable  
41.78 MHz clock for the system referred to as UCLK. To allow  
power saving, the core can operate at this frequency, or at  
binary submultiples of it. The actual core operating frequency,  
UCLK/2CD, is refered to as HCLK. The default core clock is the  
PLL clock divided by 8 (CD = 3) or 5.22 MHz. The core clock  
frequency can also come from an external clock on the ECLK  
pin as described in Figure 55. The core clock can be outputted  
on the ECLK pin when using an internal oscillator or external  
crystal.  
In case of crystal loss, the watchdog timer should be used.  
During initialization, a test on the RSTSTA can determine  
if the reset came from the watchdog timer.  
External Clock Selection  
To switch to an external clock on P0.7, configure P0.7 in  
Mode 1 and MDCLK bits to 11. External clock can be up  
to 44 MHz providing the tolerance is 1ꢀ.  
Power Control System  
XCLKO  
XCLKI  
WATCHDOG  
TIMER  
INT. 32kHz*  
OSCILLATOR  
CRYSTAL  
OSCILLATOR  
A choice of operating modes is available on the ADuC7019/  
7020/7021/7022/7024/7025/7026/7027.  
WAKEUP  
TIMER  
Table 30 describes what part is powered on in the different  
modes and indicates the power-up time. Table 31 gives some  
typical values of the total current consumption (analog + digital  
supply currents) in the different modes depending on the clock  
divider bits. The ADC is turned off. Note that these values also  
include current consumption of the regulator and other parts  
on the test board on which these values are measured.  
AT POWER UP  
OCLK 32.768kHz  
41.78MHz  
PLL  
P0.7/XCLK  
MDCLK  
UCLK  
ANALOG  
PERIPHERALS  
2
I C  
CD  
/2  
CD  
CORE  
HCLK  
*32.768kHz ±3%  
P0.7/ECLK  
Figure 55. Clocking System  
The selection of the clock source is in the PLLCON register. By  
default, the part uses the internal oscillator feeding the PLL.  
Table 30. Operating Modes  
Mode  
Active  
Pause  
Nap  
Sleep  
Stop  
Core  
Peripherals  
PLL  
X
X
XTAL/T2/T3  
IRQ0 to IRQ3  
Start-up/Power-on Time  
130 ms at CD = 0  
24 ns at CD = 0; 3 ꢀs at CD = 7  
24 ns at CD = 0; 3 ꢀs at CD = 7  
1.58 ms  
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
1.7 ms  
Table 31. Typical Current Consumption at 25°C  
PC[2-0]  
Mode  
Active  
Pause  
Nap  
CD = 0  
33.1  
22.7  
3.8  
CD = 1  
21.2  
13.3  
3.8  
CD = 2  
13.8  
8.5  
CD = 3  
10  
6.1  
CD = 4  
8.1  
4.9  
CD = 5  
7.2  
4.3  
CD = 6  
6.7  
4
CD = 7  
6.45  
3.85  
3.8  
000  
001  
010  
3.8  
3.8  
3.8  
3.8  
3.8  
011  
100  
Sleep  
Stop  
0.4  
0.4  
0.4  
0.4  
0.4  
0.4  
0.4  
0.4  
0.4  
0.4  
0.4  
0.4  
0.4  
0.4  
0.4  
0.4  
Rev. A | Page 51 of 92  
 
 
 
ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27  
Table 33. POWCON MMR Bit Designations  
MMRs and Keys  
Bit  
Value  
Name  
Description  
The operating mode, clocking mode, and programmable clock  
divider are controlled via two MMRs, PLLCON (see Table 32)  
and POWCON (see Table 33). PLLCON controls the operating  
mode of the clock system, while POWCON controls the core  
clock frequency and the power-down mode.  
7
Reserved.  
6:4  
PC  
Operating Modes.  
Active Mode.  
Pause Mode.  
Nap.  
Sleep Mode. IRQ0 to IRQ3 and  
Timer2 can wake up the  
000  
001  
010  
011  
To prevent accidental programming, a certain sequence (see  
Table 34) has to be followed to write to the PLLCON and  
POWCON registers.  
ADuC7019/7020/7021/7022/7024/  
7025/7026/7027.  
100  
Stop Mode. IRQ0 to IRQ3 can wake  
up the ADuC7019/7020/7021/  
7022/7024/7025/7026/7027.  
Reserved.  
Reserved.  
PLLKEYx Registers  
Name  
Address  
Default Value  
0x0000  
0x0000  
Access  
W
W
PLLKEY1  
PLLKEY2  
0xFFFF0410  
0xFFFF0418  
Others  
3
2:0  
CD  
CPU Clock Divider Bits.  
41.78 MHz.  
20.89 MHz.  
10.44 MHz.  
5.22 MHz.  
2.61 MHz.  
1.31 MHz.  
653 kHz.  
326 kHz.  
PLLCON Register  
000  
001  
010  
011  
100  
101  
110  
111  
Name  
Address  
Default Value  
Access  
PLLCON  
0xFFFF0414  
0x21  
R/W  
POWKEYx Registers  
Name  
Address  
Default Value  
0x0000  
0x0000  
Access  
W
W
POWKEY1  
POWKEY2  
0xFFFF0404  
0xFFFF040C  
Table 34. PLLCON and POWCON Write Sequence  
POWCON Register  
PLLCON  
POWCON  
Name  
Address  
Default Value  
Access  
PLLKEY1 = 0xAA  
PLLCON = 0x01  
PLLKEY2 = 0x55  
POWKEY1 = 0x01  
POWCON = User Value  
POWKEY2 = 0xF4  
POWCON  
0xFFFF0408  
0x0003  
R/W  
Table 32. PLLCON MMR Bit Designations  
Bit Value Name  
Description  
7:6  
Reserved.  
5
OSEL  
32 kHz PLL Input Selection. Set by  
user to use the internal 32 kHz  
oscillator. Set by default. Cleared by  
user to use the external 32 kHz crystal.  
4:2  
1:0  
Reserved.  
MDCLK Clocking Modes.  
Reserved.  
00  
01  
10  
11  
PLL. Default configuration.  
Reserved.  
External Clock on P0.7 Pin.  
Rev. A | Page 52 of 92  
 
 
 
 
 
ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27  
DIGITAL PERIPHERALS  
THREE-PHASE PWM  
In double update mode, it is also possible to produce  
asymmetrical PWM patterns that produce lower harmonic  
distortion in three-phase PWM inverters. This technique  
permits closed-loop controllers to change the average voltage  
applied to the machine windings at a faster rate. As a result,  
faster closed-loop bandwidths are achieved. The operating  
mode of the PWM block is selected by a control bit in the  
PWMCON register. In single update mode, a PWMSYNC pulse  
is produced at the start of each PWM period. In double update  
mode, an additional PWMSYNC pulse is produced at the  
midpoint of each PWM period.  
Each ADuC7019/7020/7021/7022/7024/7025/7026/7027  
provides a flexible and programmable, three-phase pulse-width  
modulation (PWM) waveform generator. It can be programmed  
to generate the required switching patterns to drive a three-  
phase voltage source inverter for ac induction motor control  
(ACIM).  
Note that only active high patterns can be produced.  
The PWM generator produces three pairs of PWM signals on the  
six PWM output pins (PWM0H, PWM0L, PWM1H, PWM1L,  
PWM2H, and PWM2L). The six PWM output signals consist of  
three high-side drive signals and three low-side drive signals.  
The PWM block can also provide an internal synchronization  
pulse on the PWMSYNC pin that is synchronized to the PWM  
switching frequency. In single update mode, a pulse is produced  
at the start of each PWM period. In double update mode, an  
additional pulse is produced at the mid-point of each PWM  
period. The width of the pulse is programmable through the  
PWMDAT2 register. The PWM block can also accept an external  
synchronization pulse on the PWMSYNC pin. The selection of  
external synchronization or internal synchronization is in the  
PWMCON register. The SYNC input timing can be synchronized  
to the internal peripheral clock, which is selected in the  
PWMCON register. If the external synchronization pulse from  
the chip pin is asynchronous to the internal peripheral clock  
(typical case), the external PWMSYNC is considered  
The switching frequency and dead time of the generated PWM  
patterns are programmable using the PWMDAT0 and  
PWMDAT1 MMRs. In addition, three duty-cycle control  
registers (PWMCH0, PWMCH1, and PWMCH2) directly  
control the duty cycles of the three pairs of PWM signals.  
Each of the six PWM output signals can be enabled or disabled by  
separate output enable bits of the PWMEN register. In addition,  
three control bits of the PWMEN register permit crossover of  
the two signals of a PWM pair. In crossover mode, the PWM  
signal destined for the high-side switch is diverted to the comple-  
mentary low-side output. The signal destined for the low-side  
switch is diverted to the corresponding high-side output signal.  
asynchronous and should be synchronized. The synchronization  
logic adds latency and jitter from the external pulse to the actual  
PWM outputs. The size of the pulse on the PWMSYNC pin must be  
greater than two core clock periods.  
In many applications, there is a need to provide an isolation  
barrier in the gate-drive circuits that turn on the power devices  
of the inverter. In general, there are two common isolation  
techniques, optical isolation using opto-couplers, and  
transformer isolation using pulse transformers. The PWM  
controller permits mixing of the output PWM signals with a  
high frequency chopping signal to permit easy interface to such  
pulse transformers. The features of this gate-drive chopping  
mode can be controlled by the PWMCFG register. An 8-bit  
value within the PWMCFG register directly controls the  
chopping frequency. High frequency chopping can be  
independently enabled for the high-side and low-side outputs  
using separate control bits in the PWMCFG register.  
The PWM signals produced by the ADuC7019/7020/7021/  
7022/7024/7025/7026/7027 can be shut off via a dedicated  
asynchronous PWM shutdown pin, PWMTRIP. When brought  
low, PWMTRIP instantaneously places all six PWM outputs in the  
off state (high). This hardware shutdown mechanism is  
asynchronous so that the associated PWM disable circuitry does  
not go through any clocked logic. This ensures correct PWM  
shutdown even in the event of a core clock loss.  
Status information about the PWM system is available to the  
user in the PWMSTA register. In particular, the state of the  
PWMTRIP pin is available, as well as a status bit that indicates  
whether operation is in the first half or the second half of the  
PWM period.  
The PWM generator can operate in one of two distinct modes,  
single update mode or double update mode. In single update  
mode, the duty cycle values are programmable only once per  
PWM period, so that the resulting PWM patterns are  
symmetrical about the midpoint of the PWM period. In the  
double update mode, a second updating of the PWM duty cycle  
values is implemented at the midpoint of the PWM period.  
Rev. A | Page 53 of 92  
 
ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27  
The Output Control Unit. This block can redirect the  
outputs of the three-phase timing unit for each channel to  
either the high-side or low-side output. In addition, the  
output control unit allows individual enabling/disabling of  
each of the six PWM output signals.  
40-Pin Package Devices  
On the 40-pin package devices, the PWM outputs are not  
directly accessible, as described in the General-Purpose  
Input/Output section. One channel can be brought out on a  
GPIO via the PLA as shown in this example:  
The Gate Drive Unit. This block can generate the high  
frequency chopping frequency and its subsequent mixing  
with the PWM signals.  
PWMCON = 0x1;  
PWMDAT0 = 0x055F;  
// enables PWM o/p  
// PWM switching freq  
// Configure Port Pins  
GP4CON = 0x300;  
GP3CON = 0x1;  
// P4.2 as PLA output  
The PWM Shutdown Controller. This block takes care of  
the PWM shutdown via the PWMTRIP pin and generates the  
correct reset signal for the timing unit.  
// P3.0 configured as  
// output of PWM0  
//(internally)  
The PWMSYNC pulse control unit generates the internal  
synchronization pulse and also controls whether the external  
PWMSYNC pin is used or not.  
// PWM0 onto P4.2  
PLAELM8 = 0x0035;  
// P3.0 (PWM output)  
// input of element 8  
PLAELM10 = 0x0059; // PWM from element 8  
The PWM controller is driven by the ADuC7019/7020/  
7021/7022/7024/7025/7026/7027 core clock frequency and is  
capable of generating two interrupts to the ARM core. One  
interrupt is generated on the occurrence of a PWMSYNC pulse,  
and the other is generated on the occurrence of any PWM  
shutdown action.  
Description of the PWM Block  
A functional block diagram of the PWM controller is shown in  
Figure 56. The generation of the six output PWM signals on  
pins PWM0H to PWM2L is controlled by four important blocks:  
The Three-Phase PWM Timing Unit. The core of the PWM  
controller, it generates three pairs of complemented and dead-  
time-adjusted, center-based PWM signals.  
CONFIGURATION  
REGISTERS  
DUTY CYCLE  
REGISTERS  
PWMCON  
PWMDAT0  
PWMDAT1  
PWMDAT2  
PWMCH0  
PWMCH1  
PWMCH2  
PWMEN  
PWMCFG  
PWM0  
PWM0  
PWM1  
PWM1  
PWM2  
PWM2  
H
L
H
L
H
L
THREE-PHASE  
PWM TIMING  
UNIT  
OUTPUT  
CONTROL  
UNIT  
GATE  
DRIVE  
UNIT  
PWM  
SHUTDOWN  
CONTROLLER  
CORE CLOCK  
SYNC  
PWM  
PWM  
SYNC  
TO INTERRUPT  
CONTROLLER  
TRIP  
Figure 56. Overview of the PWM Controller  
Rev. A | Page 54 of 92  
 
ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27  
The PWMDAT1 register is a 10-bit register with a maximum  
value of 0x3FF (= 1023), which corresponds to a maximum  
programmed dead time of  
Three-Phase Timing Unit  
PWM Switching Frequency (PWMDAT0 MMR)  
The PWM switching frequency is controlled by the PWM  
period register, PWMDAT0. The fundamental timing unit of  
the PWM controller is  
TD(max) = 1023 × 2 × tCORE = 1023 × 2 × 24 ×10–9 = 48.97 μs  
for a core clock of 41.78 MHz  
Obviously, the dead time can be programmed to be zero by  
writing 0 to the PWMDAT1 register.  
t
CORE = 1/fCORE  
where fCORE is the core frequency of the MicroConverter.  
PWM Operating Mode (PWMCON, PWMSTA MMRs)  
Therefore, for a 41.78 MHz fCORE, the fundamental time  
increment is 24 ns. The value written to the PWMDAT0  
register is effectively the number of fCORE clock increments in ½  
a PWM period. The required PWMDAT0 value is a function of  
the desired PWM switching frequency (fPWN) and is given by  
As previously discussed, the PWM controller of the  
ADuC7019/7020/7021/7022/7024/7025/7026/7027 can operate  
in two distinct modes, single update mode and double update  
mode. The operating mode of the PWM controller is  
determined by the state of Bit 2 of the PWMCON register.  
If this bit is cleared, the PWM operates in the single update  
mode. Setting Bit 2 places the PWM in the double update  
mode. The default operating mode is single update mode.  
PWMDAT0 = fCORE/(2 × fPWM  
)
Therefore, the PWM switching period, TS, can be written as  
TS = 2 × PWMDAT0 × tCORE  
In single update mode, a single PWMSYNC pulse is produced  
in each PWM period. The rising edge of this signal marks the  
start of a new PWM cycle, and is used to latch new values from  
the PWM configuration registers (PWMDAT0 and PWMDAT1)  
and the PWM duty cycle registers (PWMCH0, PWMCH1, and  
PWMCH2) into the three-phase timing unit. In addition, the  
PWMEN register is latched into the output control unit on the  
rising edge of the PWMSYNC pulse. In effect, this means that  
the characteristics and resulting duty cycles of the PWM signals  
can be updated only once per PWM period at the start of each  
cycle. The result is symmetrical PWM patterns about the  
midpoint of the switching period.  
The largest value that can be written to the 16-bit PWMDAT0  
MMR is 0×FFFF = 65535, which corresponds to a minimum  
PWM switching frequency of  
f
PWM(min) = 41.78 × 106/(2 × 65535) = 318.75 Hz  
Note that a PWMDAT0 value of 0 and 1 are not defined and  
should not be used.  
PWM Switching Dead Time (PWMDAT1 MMR)  
The second important parameter that must be set up in the initial  
configuration of the PWM block is the switching dead time. This  
is a short delay time introduced between turning off one PWM  
signal (0H, for example) and turning on the complementary  
signal (0L). This short time delay is introduced to permit the  
power switch to be turned off (in this case, 0H) to completely  
recover its blocking capability before the complementary switch is  
turned on. This time delay prevents a potentially destructive  
short-circuit condition from developing across the dc link  
capacitor of a typical voltage source inverter.  
In double update mode, there is an additional PWMSYNC  
pulse produced at the midpoint of each PWM period. The  
rising edge of this new PWMSYNC pulse is again used to latch  
new values of the PWM configuration registers, duty cycle  
registers, and the PWMEN register. As a result, it is possible to  
alter both the characteristics (switching frequency and dead  
time) as well as the output duty cycles at the midpoint of each  
PWM cycle. Consequently, it is also possible to produce PWM  
switching patterns that are no longer symmetrical about the  
midpoint of the period (asymmetrical PWM patterns). In  
double update mode, it may be necessary to know whether  
operation at any point in time is in either the first half or the  
second half of the PWM cycle. This information is provided by  
Bit 0 of the PWMSTA register, which is cleared during  
operation in the first half of each PWM period (between the  
rising edge of the original PWMSYNC pulse and the rising edge  
of the new PWMSYNC pulse introduced in double update  
mode). Bit 0 of the PWMSTA register is set during operation  
in the second half of each PWM period. This status bit allows  
the user to make a determination of the particular half-cycle  
during implementation of the PWMSYNC interrupt service  
routine, if required.  
The dead time is controlled by the 10-bit, read/write PWMDAT1  
register. There is only one dead-time register that controls the  
dead time inserted into all three pairs of PWM output signals.  
The dead time, TD, is related to the value in the PWMDAT1  
register by:  
TD = PWMDAT1 × 2 × tCORE  
Therefore, a PWMDAT1 value of 0x00A (= 10), introduces  
a 426 ns delay between the turn-off on any PWM signal (0H,  
for example) and the turn-on of its complementary signal (0L).  
The amount of the dead time can therefore be programmed in  
increments of 2tCORE (or 49 ns for a 41.78 MHz core clock).  
Rev. A | Page 55 of 92  
ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27  
The advantage of double update mode is that lower harmonic  
voltages can be produced by the PWM process and faster  
control bandwidths are possible. However, for a given PWM  
switching frequency, the PWMSYNC pulses occur at twice the  
rate in the double update mode. Because new duty cycle values  
must be computed in each PWMSYNC interrupt service  
routine, there is a larger computational burden on the ARM  
core in double update mode.  
Both switching edges are moved by an equal amount  
(PWMDAT1 × tCORE) to preserve the symmetrical output  
patterns.  
Also shown is the PWMSYNC pulse and Bit 0 of the PWMSTA  
register, which indicates whether operation is in the first or  
second half cycle of the PWM period.  
The resulting on-times of the PWM signals over the full PWM  
period (two half periods) produced by the timing unit can be  
written as follows:  
PWM Duty Cycles (PWMCH0, PWMCH1,  
PWMCH2 MMRs)  
On the high side  
The duty cycles of the six PWM output signals on Pin PWM0H  
to Pin PWM2L are controlled by the three, 16-bit read/write  
duty cycle registers, PWMCH0, PWMCH1, and PWMCH2.  
The duty cycle registers are programmed in integer counts of  
the fundamental time unit, tCORE. They define the desired on-  
time of the high-side PWM signal produced by the three-phase  
timing unit over half the PWM period. The switching signals  
produced by the three-phase timing unit are also adjusted to  
incorporate the programmed dead time value in the  
T0HH = PWMDAT0 + 2(PWMCH0 PWMDAT1) × tCORE  
T
0HL = PWMDAT0 − 2(PWMCH0 PWMDAT1) × tCORE  
and the corresponding duty cycles (d)  
0H = T0HH/TS = ½ + (PWMCH0 PWMDAT1)/PWMDAT0  
and on the low side  
d
T
0LH = PWMDAT0 − 2(PWMCH0 + PWMDAT1) × tCORE  
0LL = PWMDAT0 + 2(PWMCH0 + PWMDAT1) × tCORE  
PWMDAT1 register. The three-phase timing unit produces  
active low signals so that a low level corresponds to a command  
to turn on the associated power device.  
T
and the corresponding duty cycles (d)  
OL = T0LH/TS = ½ − (PWMCH0 + PWMDAT1)/PWMDAT0  
d
Figure 57 shows a typical pair of PWM outputs (in this case, 0H  
and 0L) from the timing unit in single update mode. All  
illustrated time values indicate the integer value in the  
associated register and can be converted to time by simply  
multiplying by the fundamental time increment, tCORE. Note that  
the switching patterns are perfectly symmetrical about the  
midpoint of the switching period in this mode because the same  
values of PWMCH0, PWMDAT0, and PWMDAT1 are used to  
define the signals in both half cycles of the period.  
The minimum permissible T0H and T0L values are zero,  
corresponding to a 0ꢀ duty cycle. In a similar fashion, the  
maximum value is TS, corresponding to a 100ꢀ duty cycle.  
Figure 58 shows the output signals from the timing unit for  
operation in double update mode. It illustrates a general case  
where the switching frequency, dead time, and duty cycle are all  
changed in the second half of the PWM period. Of course, the  
same value for any or all of these quantities can be used in both  
halves of the PWM cycle. However, there is no guarantee that  
symmetrical PWM signals are produced by the timing unit in  
double update mode. Figure 58 also shows that the dead time  
inserted into the PWM signals are done so in the same way as  
demonstrated in single update mode.  
Figure 57 also demonstrates how the programmed duty cycles  
are adjusted to incorporate the desired dead time into the  
resulting pair of PWM signals. Clearly, the dead time is incor-  
porated by moving the switching instants of both PWM signals  
(0H and 0L) away from the instant set by the PWMCH0 register.  
–PWMDAT0 /2  
2
–PWMDAT0/2  
0
+PWMDAT0/2  
0
–PWMDAT0/2  
+PWMDAT0 /2  
–PWMDAT0 /2  
0
+PWMDAT0 /2  
0
2
1
1
PWMCH0  
PWMCH0  
0H  
PWMCH0  
PWMCH0  
1
2
0H  
0L  
2 × PWMDAT1  
2 × PWMDAT1  
2 × PWMDAT1  
2 × PWMDAT1  
2
1
0L  
PWMDAT2+1  
PWMSYNC  
PWMSYNC  
PWMDAT2 +1  
PWMDAT2 +1  
2
1
PWMSTA (0)  
PWMSTA (0)  
PWMDAT0  
PWMDAT0  
PWMDAT0  
PWMDAT0  
2
1
Figure 57. Typical PWM Outputs of Three-Phase Timing Unit  
in Single Update Mode  
Figure 58. Typical PWM Outputs of the Three-Phase Timing Unit  
in Double Update Mode  
Rev. A | Page 56 of 92  
 
 
 
ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27  
In general, the on-times of the PWM signals in double update  
mode can be defined as follows:  
Output Control Unit  
The operation of the output control unit is controlled by the  
9-bit read/write PWMEN register. This register controls two  
distinct features of the output control unit that are directly  
useful in the control of electronic counter measures (ECM) or  
binary decimal counter measures (BDCM). The PWMEN  
register contains three crossover bits, one for each pair of PWM  
outputs. Setting Bit 8 of the PWMEN register enables the  
crossover mode for the 0H/0L pair of PWM signals, setting  
Bit 7 enables crossover on the 1H/1L pair of PWM signals, and  
setting Bit 6 enables crossover on the 2H/2L pair of PWM  
signals. If crossover mode is enabled for any pair of PWM  
signals, the high-side PWM signal from the timing unit (0H, for  
example) is diverted to the associated low-side output of the  
output control unit so that the signal ultimately appears at the  
PWM0L pin. Of course, the corresponding low-side output of  
the timing unit is also diverted to the complementary high-side  
output of the output control unit so that the signal appears at  
the PWM0H pin. Following a reset, the three crossover bits are  
cleared and the crossover mode is disabled on all three pairs of  
PWM signals. The PWMEN register also contains 6 bits (Bit 0  
to Bit 5) that can be used to individually enable or disable each  
of the six PWM outputs. If the associated bit of the PWMEN  
register is set, the corresponding PWM output is disabled  
regardless of corresponding value of the duty cycle register. This  
PWM output signal remains in the off state as long as the  
corresponding enable/disable bit of the PWMEN register is set.  
The implementation of this output enable function is  
On the high side  
T0HH = (PWMDAT01/2 + PWMDAT02/2 + PWMCH01 +  
PWMCH02 PWMDAT11 PWMDAT12) × tCORE  
T0HL = (PWMDAT01/2 + PWMDAT02/2 PWMCH01 −  
PWMCH02 + PWMDAT11 + PWMDAT12) × tCORE  
where the subscript 1 refers to the value of that register during  
the first half cycle, and the subscript 2 refers to the value during  
the second half cycle.  
The corresponding duty cycles (d) are  
d0H = T0HH/TS = (PWMDAT01/2 + PWMDAT02/2 +  
PWMCH01 + PWMCH02 PWMDAT11 PWMDAT12)/  
(PWMDAT01+ PWMDAT02)  
On the low side  
T0LH = (PWMDAT01/2 + PWMDAT02/2 + PWMCH01 +  
PWMCH02 + PWMDAT11 + PWMDAT12) × tCORE  
T0LL = (PWMDAT01/2 + PWMDAT02/2 PWMCH01 −  
PWMCH02 PWMDAT11 PWMDAT12) × tCORE  
where the subscript 1 refers to the value of that register during  
the first half cycle, and the subscript 2 refers to the value during  
the second half cycle.  
The corresponding duty cycles (d) are  
d0L = T0LH/TS = (PWMDAT01/2 + PWMDAT02/2 +  
PWMCH01 + PWMCH02 + PWMDAT11 +  
PWMDAT12)/(PWMDAT01 + PWMDAT02)  
implemented after the crossover function.  
Following a reset, all six enable bits of the PWMEN register are  
cleared, and all PWM outputs are enabled by default. In a  
manner identical to the duty cycle registers, the PWMEN is  
latched on the rising edge of the PWMSYNC signal. As a result,  
changes to this register only become effective at the start of each  
PWM cycle in single update mode. In double update mode, the  
PWMEN register can also be updated at the midpoint of the  
PWM cycle.  
For the completely general case in double update mode  
(see Figure 58), the switching period is given by  
TS = (PWMDAT01 + PWMDAT02) × tCORE  
Again, the values of T0H and T0L are constrained to lie between  
zero and TS.  
PWM signals similar to those illustrated in Figure 57 and  
Figure 58 can be produced on the 1H, 1L, 2H, and 2L outputs by  
programming the PWMCH1 and PWMCH2 registers in a manner  
identical to that described for PWMCH0. The PWM controller  
does not produce any PWM outputs until all of the PWMDAT0,  
PWMCH0, PWMCH1, and PWMCH2 registers have been written  
to at least once. Once these registers have been written, internal  
counting of the timers in the three-phase timing unit is enabled.  
In the control of an ECM, only two inverter legs are switched at  
any time, and often the high-side device in one leg must be  
switched on at the same time as the low-side driver in a second  
leg. Therefore, by programming identical duty cycle values for  
two PWM channels (for example, PWMCH0 = PWMCH1) and  
setting Bit 7 of the PWMEN register to cross over the 1H/1L  
pair of PWM signals, it is possible to turn on the high-side  
switch of Phase A and the low-side switch of Phase B at the  
same time. In the control of ECM, it is usual for the third  
inverter leg (Phase C in this example) to be disabled for a  
number of PWM cycles. This function is implemented by  
disabling both the 2H and 2L PWM outputs by setting Bit 0  
and Bit 1 of the PWMEN register.  
Writing to the PWMDAT0 register starts the internal timing of the  
main PWM timer. Provided that the PWMDAT0 register is written  
to prior to the PWMCH0, PWMCH1, and PWMCH2 registers in  
the initialization, the first PWMSYNC pulse and interrupt (if  
enabled) appear 1.5 × tCORE × PWMDAT0 seconds after the initial  
write to the PWMDAT0 register in single update mode. In double  
update mode, the first PWMSYNC pulse appears after  
PWMDAT0 × tCORE seconds.  
Rev. A | Page 57 of 92  
ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27  
This situation is illustrated in Figure 59, where it can be seen  
that both the 0H and 1L signals are identical, because  
The chopping frequency is therefore an integral subdivision of  
the MicroConverter core frequency  
PWMCH0 = PWMCH1 and the crossover bit for phase B is set.  
f
CHOP = fCORE/(4 × (GDCLK + 1))  
PWMCH0 = PWMCH0 =  
PWMCH1 PWMCH1  
The GDCLK value can range from 0 to 255, corresponding to  
a programmable chopping frequency rate from 40.8 kHz to  
10.44 MHz for a 41.78 MHz core frequency. The gate drive  
features must be programmed before operation of the PWM  
controller and are typically not changed during normal  
operation of the PWM controller. Following a reset, all bits of  
the PWMCFG register are cleared so that high frequency  
chopping is disabled, by default.  
0H  
2 × PWMDAT1  
2 × PWMDAT1  
0L  
1H  
1L  
2H  
2L  
PWMCH0  
PWMCH0  
0L  
0H  
2 × PWMDAT1  
2 × PWMDAT1  
PWMDAT0  
PWMDAT0  
Figure 59. Active LO PWM Signals Suitable for ECM Control,  
PWMCH0 = PWMCH1, Crossover 1H/1L Pair and Disable  
0L, 1H, 2H, and 2L Outputs in Single Update Mode.  
4 × (GDCLK + 1) × tCORE  
PWMDAT0  
PWMDAT0  
In addition, the other four signals (0L, 1H, 2H, and 2L) have  
been disabled by setting the appropriate enable/disable bits of  
the PWMEN register. In Figure 59, the appropriate value for  
the PWMEN register is 0×00A7. In normal ECM operation,  
each inverter leg is disabled for certain periods of time so that  
the PWMEN register is changed based on the position of the  
rotor shaft (motor commutation).  
Figure 60. Typical PWM Signals with High Frequency Gate Chopping Enabled  
on Both High-Side and Low-Side Switches  
PWM Shut Down  
In the event of external fault conditions, it is essential that the  
PWM system be instantaneously shut down in a safe fashion. A  
low level on the PWMTRIP pin provides an instantaneous,  
asynchronous (independent of the MicroConverter core clock)  
shutdown of the PWM controller. All six PWM outputs are  
placed in the off state, that is, high state. In addition, the  
PWMSYNC pulse is disabled. The PWMTRIP pin has an internal  
pull-down resistor to disable the PWM if the pin becomes  
disconnected. The state of the PWMTRIP pin can be read from  
Bit 3 of the PWMSTA register.  
Gate Drive Unit  
The gate drive unit of the PWM controller adds features that  
simplify the design of isolated gate-drive circuits for PWM  
inverters. If a transformer-coupled, power device, gate-drive  
amplifier is used, then the active PWM signal must be chopped at  
a high frequency. The 10-bit read/write PWMCFG register  
programs this high frequency chopping mode. The chopped  
active PWM signals can be required for the high-side drivers  
only, the low-side drivers only, or both the high-side and low-  
side switches. Therefore, independent control of this mode for  
both high-side and low-side switches is included with two  
separate control bits in the PWMCFG register.  
If a PWM shutdown command occurs, a PWMTRIP interrupt is  
generated, and internal timing of the three-phase timing unit of  
the PWM controller is stopped. Following a PWM shutdown, the  
PWM can only be re-enabled (in a PWMTRIP interrupt service  
routine, for example) by writing to all of the PWMDAT0,  
PWMCH0, PWMCH1, and PWMCH2 registers. Provided that  
the external fault is cleared and the PWMTRIP is returned to a  
high level, the internal timing of the three-phase timing unit  
resumes, and new duty-cycle values are latched on the next  
PWMSYNC boundary.  
Typical PWM output signals with high frequency chopping  
enabled on both high-side and low-side signals are shown in  
Figure 60. Chopping of the high-side PWM outputs (0H, 1H,  
and 2H) is enabled by setting Bit 8 of the PWMCFG register.  
Chopping of the low-side PWM outputs (0L, 1L, and 2L) is  
enabled by setting Bit 9 of the PWMCFG register. The high  
chopping frequency is controlled by the 8-bit word (GDCLK)  
placed in Bit 0 to Bit 7 of the PWMCFG register. The period of  
this high frequency carrier is  
Note that the PWMTRIP interrupt is available in IRQ only,  
and the PWMSYNC interrupt is available in FIQ only. Both  
interrupts share the same bit in the interrupt controller.  
Therefore, only one of the interrupts can be used at once.  
See the Interrupt System section for further details.  
TCHOP = (4 × (GDCLK + 1)) × tCORE  
Rev. A | Page 58 of 92  
 
 
 
ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27  
PWM MMRs Interface  
PWMCFG Register  
Name  
PWMCFG  
Address  
0xFFFFFC10  
Default Value  
0x0000  
Access  
R/W  
The PWM block is controlled via the MMRs described in this  
section.  
PWMCFG is a gate chopping register.  
PWMCON Register  
Name  
Address  
Default Value  
Access  
Table 37. PWMCFG MMR Bit Descriptions  
PWMCON  
0xFFFFFC00  
0x0000  
R/W  
Bit  
15:10  
9
Name  
Description  
PWMCON is a control register that enables the PWM and  
chooses the update rate.  
Reserved.  
CHOPLO  
CHOPHI  
GDCLK  
Low-side gate chopping enable bit.  
High-side gate chopping enable bit.  
PWM gate chopping period (unsigned).  
8
7:0  
Table 35. PWMCON MMR Bit Descriptions  
Bit  
7:5  
4
Name  
Description  
Reserved.  
PWMEN Register  
PWM_SYNCSEL  
PWM_EXTSYNC  
External Sync Select. Set to use external  
sync. Cleared to use internal sync.  
External Sync Select. Set to select  
external synchronous sync signal.  
Cleared for asynchronous sync signal.  
Double Update Mode. Set to 1 by user  
to enable double update mode.  
Cleared to 0 by the user to enable  
single update mode.  
Name  
Address  
Default Value  
0x0000  
Access  
R/W  
PWMEN  
0xFFFFFC20  
3
2
PWMEN allows enabling channel outputs and crossover. See its  
bit definitions in Table 38.  
PWMDBL  
Table 38. PWMEN MMR Bit Descriptions  
Bit Name  
Description  
1
0
PWM_SYNC_EN  
PWMEN  
PWM Synchronization Enable. Set by  
user to enable synchronization. Cleared  
by user to disable synchronization.  
PWM Enable Bit. Set to 1 by the user  
to enable the PWM. Cleared to 0 by  
the user to disable the PWM. Also  
cleared automatically with PWMTRIP.  
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0H0L_XOVR Channel 0 Output Crossover Enable Bit. Set  
to 1 by user to enable Channel 0 output  
crossover. Cleared to 0 by user to disable  
Channel 0 output crossover.  
1H1L_XOVR Channel 1 Output Crossover Enable Bit. Set  
to 1 by user to enable Channel 1 output  
crossover. Cleared to 0 by user to disable  
Channel 1 output crossover.  
2H2L_XOVR Channel 2 Output Crossover Enable Bit. Set  
to 1 by user to enable Channel 2 output  
crossover. Cleared to 0 by user to disable  
Channel 2 output crossover.  
PWMSTA Register  
Name  
PWMSTA  
Address  
0xFFFFFC04  
Default Value  
Access  
0x0000  
R/W  
0L_EN  
0H_EN  
1L_EN  
1H_EN  
2L_EN  
2H_EN  
0L Output Enable Bit. Set to 1 by user to  
disable the 0L output of the PWM. Cleared  
to 0 by user to enable the 0L output of the  
PWM.  
0H Output Enable Bit. Set to 1 by user to  
disable the 0H output of the PWM. Cleared  
to 0 by user to enable the 0H output of the  
PWM.  
1L Output Enable Bit. Set to 1 by user to  
disable the 1L output of the PWM. Cleared  
to 0 by user to enable the 1L output of the  
PWM.  
1H Output Enable Bit. Set to 1 by user to  
disable the 1H output of the PWM. Cleared  
to 0 by user to enable the 1H output of the  
PWM.  
2L Output Enable Bit. Set to 1 by user to  
disable the 2L output of the PWM. Cleared  
to 0 by user to enable the 2L output of the  
PWM.  
2H Output Enable Bit. Set to 1 by user to  
disable the 2H output of the PWM. Cleared  
to 0 by user to enable the 2H output of the  
PWM.  
PWMSTA reflects the status of the PWM.  
Table 36. PWMSTA MMR Bit Descriptions  
Bit  
15:10  
9
8
3
Name  
Description  
Reserved.  
PWMSYNCINT PWM Sync Interrupt Bit.  
PWMTRIPINT PWM Trip Interrupt Bit.  
PWMTRIP  
Raw Signal from the PWMTRIP Pin.  
Reserved.  
PWM Phase Bit. Set to 1 by the Micro-  
Converter when the timer is counting  
down (1st half). Cleared to 0 by the  
MicroConverter when the timer is  
counting up (2nd half).  
2:1  
0
PWMPHASE  
Rev. A | Page 59 of 92  
 
 
ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27  
PWMDAT0 Register  
Table 39. GPIO Pin Function Descriptions  
Name  
Address  
Default Value  
Access  
Configuration  
PWMDAT0  
0xFFFFFC08  
0x0000  
R/W  
Port Pin  
00  
01  
10  
11  
0
1
2
3
4
P0.0 GPIO  
P0.1 GPIO  
P0.2 GPIO  
P0.3 GPIO  
P0.4 GPIO/IRQ0  
P0.5 GPIO/IRQ1  
P0.6 GPIO/T1  
P0.7 GPIO  
P1.0 GPIO/T1  
P1.1 GPIO  
P1.2 GPIO  
P1.3 GPIO  
P1.4 GPIO/IRQ2  
P1.5 GPIO/IRQ3  
P1.6 GPIO  
P1.7 GPIO  
P2.0 GPIO  
P2.1 GPIO  
P2.2 GPIO  
P2.3 GPIO  
P2.4 GPIO  
P2.5 GPIO  
P2.6 GPIO  
P2.7 GPIO  
P3.0 GPIO  
P3.1 GPIO  
P3.2 GPIO  
P3.3 GPIO  
P3.4 GPIO  
P3.5 GPIO  
P3.6 GPIO  
P3.7 GPIO  
P4.0 GPIO  
P4.1 GPIO  
P4.2 GPIO  
P4.3 GPIO  
P4.4 GPIO  
P4.5 GPIO  
P4.6 GPIO  
P4.7 GPIO  
CMP  
MS2  
BLE  
BHE  
A16  
MS1  
MS0  
AE  
PLAI[7]  
PWMDAT0 is an unsigned 16-bit register for switching period.  
PWM2H  
PWM2L  
TRST  
PWMTRIP  
ADCBUSY  
MRST  
PWMDAT1 Register  
Name  
Address  
Default Value  
Access  
ADCBUSY  
PLAO[1]  
PLAO[2]  
PLAO[3]  
PLAO[4]  
PWMDAT1  
0xFFFFFC0C  
0x0000  
R/W  
PWMDAT1 is an unsigned 10-bit register for dead time.  
ECLK/XCLK1 SIN  
PWMCHx Registers  
Name  
Address  
Default Value  
0x0000  
0x0000  
Access  
R/W  
R/W  
SIN  
SOUT  
RTS  
CTS  
RI  
DCD  
DSR  
DTR  
SCL0 PLAI[0]  
SDA0 PLAI[1]  
SCL1 PLAI[2]  
SDA1 PLAI[3]  
PWMCH0  
PWMCH1  
PWMCH2  
0xFFFFFC14  
0xFFFFFC18  
0xFFFFFC1C  
0x0000  
R/W  
CLK  
PLAI[4]  
PWMCH0, PWMCH1, and PWMCH2 are channel duty cycles  
for the three phases.  
MISO PLAI[5]  
MOSI PLAI[6]  
CSL  
PWMDAT2 Register  
PLAO[0]  
Name  
Address  
Default Value  
Access  
2
CONVSTART  
PWM0H  
PWM0L  
SOUT PLAO[5]  
PWMDAT2  
0xFFFFFC24  
0x0000  
R/W  
WS  
RS  
AE  
PLAO[6]  
PLAO[7]  
PWMDAT2 is an unsigned 10-bit register for PWM sync pulse  
width.  
PWM0H  
PWM0L  
PWM1H  
PWM1L  
PWM0H  
PWM0L  
PWM1H  
PWM1L  
PWM2H  
PWM2L  
PWMTRIP  
PWMSYNC  
MS0  
MS1  
MS2  
MS3  
AD0  
AD1  
AD2  
AD3  
AD4  
AD5  
AD6  
AD7  
AD8  
AD9  
GENERAL-PURPOSE INPUT/OUTPUT  
The ADuC7019/7020/7021/7022/7024/7025/7026/7027 provide  
40 general-purpose, bi-directional I/O (GPIO) pins. All I/O pins  
are 5 V tolerant, which means that the GPIOs support an input  
voltage of 5 V. In general, many of the GPIO pins have multiple  
functions (see Table 39 for the pin function definitions). By  
default, the GPIO pins are configured in GPIO mode.  
PLAI[8]  
PLAI[9]  
PLAI[10]  
PLAI[11]  
PLAI[12]  
PLAI[13]  
PLAI[14]  
PLAI[15]  
PLAO[8]  
PLAO[9]  
All GPIO pins have an internal pull-up resistor (of about 100 kΩ)  
and their drive capability is 1.6 mA. Note that a maximum of  
20 GPIO can drive 1.6 mA at the same time. The following GPIO  
have programmable pull up: P0.0, P0.4, P0.5, P0.6, P0.7, and the  
8 GPIOs of P1.  
AD10 PLAO[10]  
AD11 PLAO[11]  
AD12 PLAO[12]  
AD13 PLAO[13]  
AD14 PLAO[14]  
AD15 PLAO[15]  
The 40 GPIO are grouped in five ports, Port 0 to Port 4. Each  
port is controlled by four or five MMRs, x representing the port  
number.  
Note that the kernel changes P0.6 from its default configuration  
at reset (MRST) to GPIO mode. If MRST is used for external  
circuitry, an external pull-up resistor should be used to ensure  
that the level on P0.6 does not drop when the kernel switches  
mode. For example, if MRST is required for power down, it can  
be reconfigured in GP0CON MMR.  
1 When configured in Mode 1, P0.7 is ECLK by default, or core clock output.  
To configure it as a clock input, MDCLK bits in PLLCON must be set to 11.  
2
CONVSTART  
The  
signal is active in all modes of P2.0.  
GPxCON Registers  
The input level of any GPIO can be read at any time in the  
GPxDAT MMR, even when the pin is configured in a different  
mode than GPIO. The PLA input are also always active.  
Name  
Address  
Default Value  
0x00000000  
0x00000000  
0x00000000  
0x00000000  
0x00000000  
Access  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
GP0CON  
GP1CON  
GP2CON  
GP3CON  
GP4CON  
0xFFFFF400  
0xFFFFF404  
0xFFFFF408  
0xFFFFF40C  
0xFFFFF410  
R/W  
Rev. A | Page 60 of 92  
 
 
 
 
ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27  
GPxCON are the port x control registers, which select the  
function of each pin of port x. as described in Table 40.  
GPxDAT Registers  
Name  
Address  
Default Value  
0x000000XX  
0x000000XX  
0x000000XX  
0x000000XX  
0x000000XX  
Access  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
GP0DAT  
GP1DAT  
GP2DAT  
GP3DAT  
GP4DAT  
0xFFFFF420  
0xFFFFF430  
0xFFFFF440  
0xFFFFF450  
0xFFFFF460  
Table 40. GPxCON MMR Bit Descriptions  
Bit  
Description  
31:30  
29:28  
27:26  
25:24  
23:22  
21:20  
19:18  
17:16  
15:14  
13:12  
11:10  
9:8  
Reserved  
Select Function of Px.7 Pin  
Reserved  
Select Function of Px.6 Pin  
Reserved  
Select Function of Px.5 Pin  
Reserved  
Select Function of Px.4 Pin  
Reserved  
Select Function of Px.3 Pin  
Reserved  
Select Function of Px.2 Pin  
Reserved  
R/W  
GPxDAT are port x configuration and data registers. They  
configure the direction of the GPIO pins of port x, set the  
output value for the pins configured as output, and store the  
input value of the pins configured as input.  
Table 42. GPxDAT MMR Bit Descriptions  
Bit  
Description  
31:24  
Direction of the Data. Set to 1 by user to configure  
the GPIO pin as an output. Cleared to 0 by user to  
configure the GPIO pin as an input.  
7:6  
23:16  
15:8  
7:0  
Port x Data Output.  
Reflect the State of Port x Pins at Reset (read only).  
Port x Data Input (read only).  
5:4  
3:2  
Select Function of Px.1 Pin  
Reserved  
1:0  
Select Function of Px.0 Pin  
GPxSET Registers  
GPxPAR Registers  
Name  
Address  
Default Value  
0x000000XX  
0x000000XX  
0x000000XX  
0x000000XX  
0x000000XX  
Access  
W
W
W
W
Name  
Address  
Default Value  
0x20000000  
0x00000000  
0x00222222  
Access  
R/W  
R/W  
GP0SET  
GP1SET  
GP2SET  
GP3SET  
GP4SET  
0xFFFFF424  
0xFFFFF434  
0xFFFFF444  
0xFFFFF454  
0xFFFFF464  
GP0PAR  
GP1PAR  
GP3PAR  
0xFFFFF42C  
0xFFFFF43C  
0xFFFFF45C  
R/W  
W
GPxPAR program the parameters for Port 0, Port 1, and Port 3.  
Note that the GPxDAT MMR must always be written after  
changing the GPxPAR MMR.  
GPxSET are data set port x registers.  
Table 43. GPxSET MMR Bit Descriptions  
Table 41. GPxPAR MMR Bit Descriptions  
Bit  
Description  
Bit  
Description  
31:24  
23:16  
Reserved.  
31:29  
28  
27:25  
24  
23:21  
20  
19:17  
16  
15:13  
12  
11:9  
8
7:5  
4
Reserved  
Pull-Up Disable Px.7  
Reserved  
Pull-Up Disable Px.6  
Reserved  
Pull-Up Disable Px.5  
Reserved  
Pull-Up Disable Px.4  
Reserved  
Pull-Up Disable Px.3  
Reserved  
Pull-Up Disable Px.2  
Reserved  
Pull-Up Disable Px.1  
Reserved  
Data Port x Set Bit. Set to 1 by user to set bit on port  
x; also sets the corresponding bit in the GPxDAT  
MMR. Cleared to 0 by user; does not affect the data out.  
15:0  
Reserved.  
GPxCLR Registers  
Name  
Address  
Default Value  
0x000000XX  
0x000000XX  
0x000000XX  
0x000000XX  
0x000000XX  
Access  
W
W
W
W
GP0CLR  
GP1CLR  
GP2CLR  
GP3CLR  
GP4CLR  
0xFFFFF428  
0xFFFFF438  
0xFFFFF448  
0xFFFFF458  
0xFFFFF468  
W
GPxCLR are data clear port x registers.  
Table 44. GPxCLR MMR Bit Descriptions  
3:1  
Bit  
Description  
0
Pull-Up Disable Px.0  
31:24  
23:16  
Reserved.  
Data Port x Clear Bit. Set to 1 by user to clear bit on  
port x; also clears the corresponding bit in the  
GPxDAT MMR. Cleared to 0 by user; does not affect  
the data out.  
15:0  
Reserved.  
Rev. A | Page 61 of 92  
 
 
ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27  
Baud Rate Generation  
SERIAL PORT MUX  
There are two ways of generating the UART baud rate.  
The serial port mux multiplexes the serial port peripherals  
(an SPI, UART, and two I2Cs) and the programmable logic array  
(PLA) to a set of ten GPIO pins. Each pin must be configured to  
one of its specific I/O functions as described in Table 45.  
1. Normal 450 UART Baud Rate Generation.  
The baud rate is a divided version of the core clock using the  
value in COMDIV0 and COMDIV1 MMRs (16-bit value, DL).  
Table 45. SPM Configuration  
GPIO  
(00)  
P1.0  
P1.1  
P1.2  
P1.3  
P1.4  
P1.5  
P1.6  
P1.7  
P0.7  
P2.0  
UART  
(01)  
UART/I2C/SPI  
(10)  
PLA  
(11)  
41.78MHz  
2CD × 16 × 2 × DL  
Baud rate =  
Pin  
SPM0  
SPM1  
SPM2  
SPM3  
SPM4  
SPM5  
SPM6  
SPM7  
SPM8  
SPM9  
SIN  
SOUT  
RTS  
CTS  
RI  
DCD  
DSR  
DTR  
ECLK/XCLK  
CONV  
I2C0SCL  
I2C0SDA  
I2C1SCL  
I2C1SDA  
SPICLK  
SPIMISO  
SPIMOSI  
SPICSL  
PLAI[0]  
PLAI[1]  
PLAI[2]  
PLAI[3]  
PLAI[4]  
PLAI[5]  
PLAI[6]  
PLAO[0]  
PLAO[4]  
PLAO[5]  
Table 47 gives some common baud rate values.  
Table 47. Baud Rate Using the Normal Baud Rate Generator  
Baud Rate  
9600  
CD  
0
DL  
Actual Baud Rate  
9600  
ꢀ Error  
88 h  
44 h  
0
0
19200  
0
19200  
115200  
9600  
0
3
3
3
0B h  
11 h  
8 h  
118691  
9600  
3
0
SIN  
SOUT  
19200  
115200  
20400  
163200  
6.25  
41.67  
1 h  
Table 45 also details the mode for each of the SPMUX GPIO  
pins. This configuration has to be done via the GP0CON,  
GP1CON, and GP2CON MMRs. By default these ten pins are  
configured as GPIOs.  
2. Using the Fractional Divider.  
The fractional divider combined with the normal baud rate  
generator produces a wider range of more accurate baud rates.  
UART SERIAL INTERFACE  
FBEN  
CORE  
CLOCK  
/2  
The UART peripheral is a full-duplex, universal, asynchronous  
receiver/transmitter. It is fully compatible with the 16450 serial port  
standard. The UART performs serial-to-parallel conversion on data  
characters received from a peripheral device or modem, and  
parallel-to-serial conversion on data characters received from the  
CPU. The UART includes a fractional divider for baud rate  
generation and has a network addressable mode. The UART  
function is made available on the 10 pins of the ADuC7019/7020/  
7021/7022/7024/7025/7026/7027 (see Table 46).  
/16DL  
UART  
/(M+N/2048)  
Figure 61. Baud Rate Generation Options  
Calculation of the baud rate using fractional divider is as  
follows:  
41.78MHz  
Baud Rate =  
N
2048  
2
CD ×16×DL×2×  
(
M +  
)
Table 46. UART Signal Description  
41.78MHz  
2048 Baud Rate × 2CD ×16 ×DL×2  
N
M +  
=
Pin  
Signal  
Description  
SPM0 (Mode 1)  
SPM1 (Mode 1)  
SPM2 (Mode 1)  
SPM3 (Mode 1)  
SPM4 (Mode 1)  
SPM5 (Mode 1)  
SPM6 (Mode 1)  
SPM7 (Mode 1)  
SPM8 (Mode 2)  
SPM9 (Mode 2)  
SIN  
SOUT  
RTS  
CTS  
RI  
DCD  
DSR  
DTR  
SIN  
Serial Receive Data  
Serial Transmit Data  
Request to Send  
Clear to Send  
Ring Indicator  
Data Carrier Detect  
Data Set Ready  
Data Terminal Ready  
Serial Receive Data  
Serial Transmit Data  
For example, generation of 19,200 baud with CD bits = 3  
(Table 47 gives DL = 8 h),  
41.78MHz  
2048 19200×23 ×16×8×2  
N
M +  
=
N
2048  
M +  
=1.06  
where:  
M = 1  
N = 0.06 × 2048 = 128  
SOUT  
The serial communication adopts an asynchronous protocol,  
which supports various word lengths, stop bits, and parity  
generation options selectable in the configuration register.  
41.78MHz  
Baud Rate =  
128  
2048  
23 ×16×8× 2×  
where:  
Baud Rate = 19,200 bps  
Rev. A | Page 62 of 92  
 
 
 
 
 
ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27  
Error = 0ꢀ compared to 6.25ꢀ with the normal baud rate  
generator.  
COMDIV1 Register  
Name  
Address  
Default Value  
Access  
COMDIV1  
0xFFFF0704  
0x00  
R/W  
UART Registers Definition  
COMDIV1 is a divisor latch (high byte) register.  
The UART interface consists on 12 registers: COMTX,  
COMRX, COMDIV0, COMIEN0, COMDIV1, COMIIDO,  
COMCON0, COMCON1, COMSTA0, COMSTA1, COMSCR,  
and COMDIV2.  
COMIID0 Register  
Name  
Address  
Default Value  
Access  
COMIID0  
0xFFFF0708  
0x01  
R
COMIID0 is the interrupt identification register.  
COMTX Register  
Name  
Address  
Default Value  
Access  
Table 49. COMIID0 MMR Bit Descriptions  
Bit 2:1  
COMTX  
0xFFFF0700  
0x00  
R/W  
Status Bit 0  
Clearing  
Operation  
COMTX is an 8-bit transmit register.  
Bits  
NINT Priority Definition  
COMRX Register  
00  
11  
1
0
No interrupt  
Receive line  
status interrupt  
Receive buffer  
full interrupt  
Transmit buffer Write data to  
empty interrupt COMTX or read  
COMIID0  
Modem status  
interrupt  
Name  
Address  
Default Value  
Access  
1
2
3
Read COMSTA0  
Read COMRX  
COMRX  
0xFFFF0700  
0x00  
R
10  
01  
0
0
COMRX is an 8-bit receive register.  
COMDIV0 Register  
Name  
Address  
Default Value  
Access  
COMDIV0  
0xFFFF0700  
0x00  
R/W  
00  
0
4
Read COMSTA1  
register  
COMDIV0 is a low-byte divisor latch. COMTX, COMRX,  
and COMDIV0 share the same address location. COMTX  
and COMRX can be accessed when Bit 7 in COMCON0  
register is cleared. COMDIV0 can be accessed when Bit 7  
of COMCON0 is set.  
COMCON0 Register  
Name  
Address  
Default Value  
Access  
COMCON0  
0xFFFF070C  
0x00  
R/W  
COMIEN0 Register  
COMCON0 is the line control register.  
Name  
Address  
Default Value  
Access  
Table 50. COMCON0 MMR Bit Descriptions  
COMIEN0  
0xFFFF0704  
0x00  
R/W  
Bit  
Name  
Description  
COMIEN0 is the interrupt enable register.  
7
DLAB  
Divisor Latch Access. Set by user to enable  
access to COMDIV0 and COMDIV1 registers.  
Cleared by user to disable access to COMDIV0  
and COMDIV1 and enable access to COMRX  
and COMTX.  
Set Break. Set by user to force SOUT to 0.  
Cleared to operate in normal mode.  
Stick Parity. Set by user to force parity to  
defined values: 1 if EPS = 1 and PEN = 1,  
0 if EPS = 0 and PEN = 1.  
Even Parity Select Bit. Set for even parity.  
Cleared for odd parity.  
Parity Enable Bit. Set by user to transmit and  
check the parity bit. Cleared by user for no  
parity transmission or checking.  
Stop Bit. Set by user to transmit 1.5 stop bits if the  
word length is 5 bits or 2 stop bits if the word  
length is 6 bits, 7 bits, or 8 bits. The receiver  
checks the first stop bit only, regardless of the  
number of stop bits selected. Cleared by user to  
generate 1 stop bit in the transmitted data.  
Word Length Select:  
00 = 5 bits, 01 = 6 bits  
10 = 7 bits, 11 = 8 bits  
Table 48. COMIEN0 MMR Bit Descriptions  
Bit  
7:4  
3
Name  
Description  
Reserved.  
EDSSI  
Modem Status Interrupt Enable Bit. Set by  
user to enable generation of an interrupt if  
any of COMSTA1[3:0] are set. Cleared by user.  
6
5
BRK  
SP  
2
1
0
ELSI  
Rx Status Interrupt Enable Bit. Set by user to  
enable generation of an interrupt if any of  
COMSTA0[3:0] are set. Cleared by user.  
Enable Transmit Buffer Empty Interrupt. Set  
by user to enable interrupt when buffer is  
empty during a transmission. Cleared by user.  
Enable Receive Buffer Full Interrupt. Set by  
user to enable interrupt when buffer is full  
during a reception. Cleared by user.  
4
3
EPS  
ETBEI  
ERBFI  
PEN  
2
STOP  
WLS  
1:0  
Rev. A | Page 63 of 92  
 
ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27  
COMCON1 Register  
COMSTA1 Register  
Name  
Address  
Default Value  
Access  
Name  
Address  
Default Value  
Access  
COMCON1  
0xFFFF0710  
0x00  
R/W  
COMSTA1  
0xFFFF0718  
0x00  
R
COMCON1 is the modem control register.  
COMSTA1 is a modem status register.  
Table 51. COMCON1 MMR Bit Descriptions  
Table 53. COMSTA1 MMR Bit Descriptions  
Bit  
7:5  
4
Name  
Description  
Bit Name Description  
Reserved.  
7
6
5
4
3
DCD  
RI  
DSR  
CTS  
Data Carrier Eetect.  
Ring Indicator.  
Data Set Ready.  
Clear To Send.  
LOOPBACK  
Loop Back. Set by user to enable loop  
back mode. In loop back mode, the  
SOUT is forced high. The modem signals  
are also directly connected to the status  
inputs (RTS to CTS, DTR to DSR, OUT1 to  
RI, and OUT2 to DCD). Cleared by user to  
be in normal mode.  
Parity Enable Bit. Set by user to transmit  
and check the parity bit. Cleared by user  
for no parity transmission or checking.  
Stop Bit. Set by user to transmit 1.5 stop  
bits if the word length is 5 bits or 2 stop  
bits if the word length is 6 bits, 7 bits, or  
8 bits. The receiver checks the first stop  
bit only, regardless of the number of  
stop bits selected. Cleared by user to  
generate 1 stop bit in the transmitted  
data.  
DDCD Delta DCD. Set automatically if DCD changed  
state since COMSTA1 last read. Cleared automati-  
cally by reading COMSTA1.  
2
1
0
TERI  
Trailing Edge RI. Set if NRI changed from 0 to 1  
since COMSTA1 last read. Cleared automatically  
by reading COMSTA1.  
3
2
PEN  
DDSR Delta DSR. Set automatically if DSR changed state  
since COMSTA1 last read. Cleared automatically  
by reading COMSTA1.  
STOP  
DCTS  
Delta CTS. Set automatically if CTS changed state  
since COMSTA1 last read. Cleared automatically  
by reading COMSTA1.  
COMSCR Register  
1
0
RTS  
DTR  
Request To Send. Set by user to force the  
RTS output to 0. Cleared by user to force  
the RTS output to 1.  
Data Terminal Ready. Set by user to force  
the DTR output to 0. Cleared by user to  
force the DTR output to 1.  
Name  
Address  
Default Value  
Access  
COMSCR  
0xFFFF071C  
0x00  
R/W  
COMSCR is an 8-bit scratch register used for temporary  
storage. It is also used in network addressable UART mode.  
COMDIV2 Register  
Name  
Address  
Default Value  
Access  
COMSTA0 Register  
COMDIV2  
0xFFFF072C  
0x0000  
R/W  
Name  
Address  
Default Value  
Access  
COMSTA0  
0xFFFF0714  
0x60  
R
COMDIV2 is a 16-bit fractional baud divide register.  
COMSTA0 is the line status register.  
Table 54. COMDIV2 MMR Bit Descriptions  
Bit  
Name  
Description  
Table 52. COMSTA0 MMR Bit Descriptions  
Bit Name Description  
15  
FBEN  
Fractional Baud Rate Generator Enable Bit.  
Set by user to enable the fractional baud  
rate generator. Cleared by user to generate  
baud rate using the standard 450 UART  
baud rate generator.  
Reserved.  
M if FBM = 0, M = 4.  
7
6
Reserved.  
TEMT  
THRE  
COMTX Empty Status Bit. Set automatically if  
COMTX is empty. Cleared automatically when  
writing to COMTX.  
COMTX and COMRX Empty. Set automatically if  
COMTX and COMRX are empty. Cleared automati-  
cally when one of the register receives data.  
14:13  
12:11  
10:0  
5
FBM[1-0]  
FBN[10-0] N.  
4
3
2
1
0
BI  
Break Error. Set when SIN is held low for more than  
the maximum word length. Cleared automatically.  
Framing Error. Set when invalid stop bit. Cleared  
automatically.  
Parity Error. Set when a parity error occurs.  
Cleared automatically.  
Overrun Error. Set automatically if data is over-  
written before being read. Cleared automatically.  
Data Ready. Set automatically when COMRX is  
full. Cleared by reading COMRX.  
FE  
PE  
OE  
DR  
Rev. A | Page 64 of 92  
 
ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27  
Network Addressable UART Mode  
Table 56. COMIID1 MMR Bit Descriptions  
Bit 3:1  
Status  
Bits  
This mode connects the MicroConverter to a 256-node serial  
network, either as a hardware single-master or via software in a  
multimaster network. Bit 7 of COMIEN1 (ENAM bit) must be set  
to enable UART in network addressable mode. Note that there is  
no parity check in this mode; the parity bit is used for address.  
Bit 0  
Clearing  
Operation  
NINT Priority Definition  
000  
110  
1
0
No interrupt  
Matching  
network address  
Address  
transmitted,  
buffer empty  
Receive line  
status interrupt  
Receive buffer  
full interrupt  
2
3
Read COMRX  
101  
0
Write data to  
COMTX or  
read COMIID0  
Read  
COMSTA0  
Network Addressable UART Register Definitions  
Four additional registers, COMSCR, COMIEN1, COMIID1, and  
COMADR are only used in network addressable UART mode.  
011  
010  
001  
0
0
0
1
2
3
COMSCR is an 8-bit scratch register used for temporary  
storage. In network address mode, the least significant bit of the  
scratch register is the transmitted network address control bit.  
If set to 1, the device is transmitting an address. If cleared to 0,  
the device is transmitting data.  
Read COMRX  
Transmit buffer  
Write data to  
empty interrupt COMTX or  
read COMIID0  
000  
0
4
Modem status  
interrupt  
Read COMSTA1  
register  
COMIEN1 Register  
Name  
Address  
Default Value  
Access  
COMIEN1  
0xFFFF0720  
0x04  
R/W  
COMADR Register  
COMIEN1 is an 8-bit network enable register.  
Name  
Address  
Default Value  
Access  
COMADR  
0xFFFF0728  
0xAA  
R/W  
Table 55. COMIEN1 MMR Bit Descriptions  
Bit  
Name  
Description  
COMADR is an 8-bit, read/write network address register that  
holds the address that the network addressable UART checks  
for. Upon receiving this address, the device interrupts the  
processor and/or sets the appropriate status bit in COMIID1.  
7
ENAM  
Network Address Mode Enable Bit. Set by user  
to enable network address mode. Cleared by  
user to disable network address mode.  
9-Bit Transmit Enable Bit. Set by user to enable  
9-bit transmit. ENAM must be set. Cleared by  
user to disable 9-bit transmit.  
9-Bit Receive Enable Bit. Set by user to enable  
9-bit receive. ENAM must be set. Cleared by  
user to disable 9-bit receive.  
Network Interrupt Enable Bit.  
Word Length. Set for 9-bit data. E9BT has to be  
cleared. Cleared for 8-bit data.  
Transmitter Pin Driver Enable Bit. Set by user to  
enable SOUT pin as an output in slave mode or  
multimaster mode. Cleared by user; SOUT is  
three-state.  
6
5
E9BT  
E9BR  
SERIAL PERIPHERAL INTERFACE  
The ADuC7019/7020/7021/7022/7024/7025/7026/7027 integrate  
a complete hardware serial peripheral interface (SPI) on-chip. SPI  
is an industry standard, synchronous serial interface that allows  
eight bits of data to be synchronously transmitted and simultane-  
ously received, that is, full duplex up to a maximum bit rate of  
3.48 Mb as shown in Table 57. The SPI interface is not  
operational with core clock divider bits (CD bits) POWCON[2:0]  
= 6 or 7 in master mode.  
4
3
ENI  
E9BD  
2
ETD  
The SPI port can be configured for master or slave operation  
and typically consists of four pins: MISO, MOSI, SCL, and CS.  
1
0
NABP  
NAB  
Network Address Bit. Interrupt polarity bit.  
Network Address Bit. Set by user to transmit the  
slave’s address. Cleared by user to transmit data.  
MISO (Master In, Slave Out) Pin  
The MISO pin is configured as an input line in master mode  
and an output line in slave mode. The MISO line on the master  
(data in) should be connected to the MISO line in the slave  
device (data out). The data is transferred as byte wide (8-bit)  
serial data, MSB first.  
COMIID1 Register  
Name  
Address  
Default Value  
Access  
COMIID1  
0xFFFF0724  
0x01  
R
COMIID1 is an 8-bit network interrupt register. Bit 7 to Bit 4  
are reserved (see Table 56).  
MOSI (Master Out, Slave In) Pin  
The MOSI pin is configured as an output line in master mode  
and an input line in slave mode. The MOSI line on the master  
(data out) should be connected to the MOSI line in the slave  
device (data in). The data is transferred as byte wide (8-bit)  
serial data, MSB first.  
Rev. A | Page 65 of 92  
 
 
ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27  
SCL (Serial Clock) I/O Pin  
SPISTA Register  
Name  
Address  
Default Value  
Access  
The master serial clock (SCL) is used to synchronize the data  
being transmitted and received through the MOSI SCL period.  
Therefore, a byte is transmitted/received after eight SCL  
periods. The SCL pin is configured as an output in master mode  
and as an input in slave mode.  
SPISTA  
0xFFFF0A00  
0x00  
R/W  
SPISTA is an 8-bit read-only status register. Only Bit 1 or Bit 4  
of this register generates an interrupt. Bit 6 of the SPICON  
register determines which bit generates the interrupt.  
Table 58. SPISTA MMR Bit Descriptions  
In master mode, polarity and phase of the clock are controlled  
by the SPICON register, and the bit rate is defined in the  
SPIDIV register as follows:  
Bit  
7:6  
5
Description  
Reserved.  
SPIRX Data Register Overflow Status Bit. Set if SPIRX is  
overflowing. Cleared by reading SPIRX register.  
fUCLK  
fserial clock  
=
2×(1+ SPIDIV )  
4
3
SPIRX Data Register IRQ. Set automatically if Bit 3 or Bit 5  
is set. Cleared by reading SPIRX register.  
SPIRX Data Register Full Status Bit. Set automatically if a  
valid data is present in the SPIRX register. Cleared by  
reading SPIRX register.  
The maximum speed of the SPI clock is dependant on the clock  
divider bits and is summarized in Table 57.  
Table 57. SPI Speed vs. Clock Divider Bits in Master Mode  
2
1
0
SPITX Data Register Underflow Status Bit. Set auto-  
matically if SPITX is under flowing. Cleared by writing in  
the SPITX register.  
SPITX Data Register IRQ. Set automatically if Bit 0 is clear  
or Bit 2 is set. Cleared by writing in the SPITX register or if  
finished transmission disabling the SPI.  
SPITX Data Register Empty Status Bit. Set by writing to  
SPITX to send data. This bit is set during transmission of  
data. Cleared when SPITX is empty.  
CD Bits  
0
1
2
3
4
5
SPIDIV in  
hex  
0x05  
0x0B 0x17  
0x2F  
0x5F  
0xBF  
SPI speed 3.482 1.741 0.870  
in MHz  
0.435  
0.218  
0.109  
In slave mode, the SPICON register must be configured with  
the phase and polarity of the expected input clock. The slave  
accepts data from an external master up to 10.4 Mb at CD = 0.  
The formula to determine the maximum speed is as follow:  
SPIRX Register  
fHCLK  
Name  
Address  
Default Value  
Access  
fserialclock  
=
4
SPIRX  
0xFFFF0A04  
0x00  
R
SPIRX is an 8-bit read-only receive register.  
In both master and slave modes, data is transmitted on one edge  
of the SCL signal and sampled on the other. Therefore, it is  
important that the polarity and phase are configured the same  
for the master and slave devices.  
SPITX Register  
Name  
Address  
Default Value  
Access  
SPITX  
0xFFFF0A08  
0x00  
W
Chip Select (CS) Input Pin  
SPITX is an 8-bit write-only transmit register.  
CS  
In SPI slave mode, a transfer is initiated by the assertion of  
which is an active low input signal. The SPI port then transmits  
and receives 8-bit data until the transfer is concluded by  
,
SPIDIV Register  
Name  
Address  
Default Value  
Access  
SPIDIV  
0xFFFF0A0C  
0x1B  
R/W  
CS  
CS  
deassertion of . In slave mode,  
is always an input.  
SPIDIV is an 8-bit serial clock divider register.  
SPI Registers  
SPICON Register  
The following MMR registers are used to control the SPI  
interface: SPISTA, SPIRX, SPITX, SPIDIV, and SPICON.  
Name  
Address  
Default Value  
Access  
SPICON  
0xFFFF0A10  
0x0000  
R/W  
SPICON is a 16-bit control register.  
Rev. A | Page 66 of 92  
 
 
ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27  
Table 59. SPICON MMR Bit Descriptions  
Bit  
Description  
15:13  
12  
Reserved.  
Continuous Transfer Enable. Set by user to enable continuous transfer. In master mode, the transfer continues until no valid data  
is available in the TX register. CS is asserted and remains asserted for the duration of each 8-bit serial transfer until TX is empty.  
Cleared by user to disable continuous transfer. Each transfer consists of a single 8-bit serial transfer. If valid data exists in the  
SPITX register, then a new transfer is initiated after a stall period.  
11  
10  
9
Loop Back Enable. Set by user to connect MISO to MOSI and test software. Cleared by user to be in normal mode.  
Slave Output Enable. Set by user to enable the slave output. Cleared by user to disable slave output.  
Slave Select Input Enable. Set by user in master mode to enable the output. Cleared by user to disable master output.  
8
SPIRX Overflow Overwrite Enable. Set by user, the valid data in the RX register is overwritten by the new serial byte received.  
Cleared by user, the new serial byte received is discarded.  
7
6
SPITX Underflow Mode. Set by user to transmit 0. Cleared by user to transmit the previous data.  
Transfer and Interrupt Mode. Set by user to initiate transfer with a write to the SPITX register. Interrupt only occurs when TX is  
empty. Cleared by user to initiate transfer with a read of the SPIRX register. Interrupt only occurs when RX is full.  
5
4
3
2
LSB First Transfer Enable Bit. Set by user, the LSB is transmitted first. Cleared by user, the MSB is transmitted first.  
Reserved.  
Serial Clock Polarity Mode Bit. Set by user, the serial clock idles high. Cleared by user, the serial clock idles low.  
Serial Clock Phase Mode Bit. Set by user, the serial clock pulses at the beginning of each serial bit transfer. Cleared by user, the  
serial clock pulses at the end of each serial bit transfer.  
1
0
Master Mode Enable Bit. Set by user to enable master mode. Cleared by user to enable slave mode.  
SPI Enable Bit. Set by user to enable the SPI. Cleared by user to disable the SPI.  
I2C COMPATIBLE INTERFACES  
Serial Clock Generation  
The I2C master in the system generates the serial clock for a  
transfer. The master channel can be configured to operate in  
fast mode (400 kHz) or standard mode (100 kHz).  
The ADuC7019/7020/7021/7022/7024/7025/7026/7027 support  
two fully licensed I2C interfaces. The I2C interfaces are both  
implemented as a full hardware master and slave interface. Because  
the two I2C interfaces are identical, this data sheet describes only  
I2C0 in detail. Note that the two masters and one of the slaves have  
individual interrupts. See the Interrupt System section.  
The bit rate is defined in the I2C0DIV MMR as follows:  
fUCLK  
fserialclock  
=
(2 + DIVH) + (2 + DIVL)  
The two pins used for data transfer, SDA and SCL, are  
configured in a wired-AND format that allows arbitration in a  
multimaster system.  
where:  
UCLK = clock before the clock divider.  
f
The I2C bus peripherals address in the I2C bus system is  
programmed by the user. This ID can be modified any time a  
transfer is not in progress. The user can configure the interface  
to respond to four slave addresses.  
DIVH = the high period of the clock.  
DIVL = the low period of the clock.  
Thus, for 100 kHz operation,  
DIVH = DIVL = 0×CF  
The transfer sequence of an I2C system consists of a master  
device initiating a transfer by generating a start condition while  
the bus is idle. The master transmits the address of the slave  
device and the direction of the data transfer in the initial  
address transfer. If the master does not lose arbitration and the  
slave acknowledges, then the data transfer is initiated. This  
continues until the master issues a stop condition and the bus  
becomes idle.  
and for 400 kHz,  
DIVH = DIVL = 0×32  
The I2C×DIV register corresponds to DIVH:DIVL.  
Slave Addresses  
The registers I2C0ID0, I2C0ID1, I2C0ID2, and I2C0ID3  
contain the device IDs. The device compares the four I2C0IDx  
registers to the address byte. The seven most significant bits of  
either ID register must be identical to that of the seven most  
significant bits of the first address byte received to be correctly  
addressed. The LSB of the ID registers, the transfer direction  
bit, is ignored in the process of address recognition.  
The I2C peripheral master and slave functionality are  
independent and can be simultaneously active. A slave is  
activated when a transfer has been initiated on the bus. If it is  
not addressed, it remains inactive until another transfer is  
initiated. This also allows a master device, which loses  
arbitration, to respond as a slave in the same cycle.  
Rev. A | Page 67 of 92  
 
ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27  
I2C Registers  
Table 61. I2C0SSTA MMR Bit Descriptions  
The I2C peripheral interface consists of 18 MMRs, which are  
discussed in this section.  
Bit  
Value Description  
31:15  
14  
Reserved. These bits should be written as 0.  
START Decode Bit. Set by hardware if the  
device receives a valid START + matching  
address. Cleared by an I2C STOP condition  
or an I2C general call reset.  
Repeated START Decode Bit. Set by hardware  
if the device receives a valid repeated START +  
matching address. Cleared by an I2C STOP  
condition, a read of the I2CSSTA register,  
or an I2C general call reset.  
I2CxMSTA Registers  
Name  
Address  
Default Value  
0x00  
0x00  
Access  
I2C0MSTA  
I2C1MSTA  
0xFFFF0800  
0xFFFF0900  
R
R
13  
I2CxMSTA are status registers for the master channel.  
Table 60. I2C0MSTA MMR Bit Descriptions  
Bit Description  
12:11  
ID Decode Bits.  
7
Master Transmit FIFO Flush. Set by user to flush the master  
Tx FIFO. Cleared automatically once the master Tx FIFO is  
flushed. This bit also flushes the slave receive FIFO.  
00  
01  
10  
11  
Received Address Natched ID Register 0.  
Received Address Matched ID Register 1.  
Received Address Matched ID Register 2.  
Received Address Matched ID Register 3.  
6
5
4
Master Busy. Set automatically if the master is busy. Cleared  
automatically.  
10  
Stop After Start and Matching Address  
Arbitration Loss. Set in multimaster mode if another master  
has the bus. Cleared when the bus becomes available.  
No ACK. Set automatically if there is no acknowledge of the  
address by the slave device. Cleared automatically by  
reading the I2C0MSTA register.  
Interrupt. Set by hardware if the slave device  
receives an I2C STOP condition after a previous  
I2C START condition and matching address.  
Cleared by a read of the I2C0SSTA register.  
9:8  
General Call ID.  
3
2
1
Master Receive IRQ. Set after receiving data. Cleared  
automatically by reading the I2C0MRX register.  
Master Transmit IRQ. Set at the end of a transmission.  
Cleared automatically by writing to the I2C0MTX register.  
Master Transmit FIFO Underflow. Set automatically if the  
master transmit FIFO is underflowing. Cleared  
00  
01  
10  
11  
No General Call.  
General Call Reset and Program Address.  
General Call Program Address.  
General Call Matching Alternative ID.  
7
General Call Interrupt. Set if the slave device  
receives a general call of any type. Cleared by  
setting Bit 8 of the I2CxCFG register. If it is a  
general call reset, then all registers are at their  
default values. If it is a hardware general call,  
then the Rx FIFO holds the second byte of the  
general call. This is similar to the I2C0ALT  
register (unless it is a general call to reprogram  
the device address). For more details, see I2C  
bus specification, version 2.1, Jan. 2000.  
Slave Busy. Set automatically if the slave is  
busy. Cleared automatically.  
No ACK. Set if master asking for data and no  
data is available. Cleared automatically by  
reading the I2C0SSTA register.  
automatically by writing to the I2C0MTX register.  
0
Master TX FIFO Empty. Set automatically if the master  
transmit FIFO is empty. Cleared automatically by writing to  
the I2C0MTX register.  
I2CxSSTA Registers  
Name  
Address  
Default Value  
0x01  
0x01  
Access  
I2C0SSTA  
I2C1SSTA  
0xFFFF0804  
0xFFFF0904  
R
R
6
5
I2CxSSTA are status registers for the slave channel.  
4
3
2
1
Slave Receive FIFO Overflow. Set automatically  
if the slave receive FIFO is overflowing. Cleared  
automatically by reading the I2C0SSTA register.  
Slave Receive IRQ. Set after receiving data.  
Cleared automatically by reading the I2C0SRX  
register or flushing the FIFO.  
Slave Transmit IRQ. Set at the end of a trans-  
mission. Cleared automatically by writing to  
the I2C0STX register.  
Slave Transmit FIFO Underflow. Set automatically  
if the slave transmit FIFO is underflowing.  
Cleared automatically by writing to the  
I2C0SSTA MMR.  
0
Slave Transmit FIFO Empty. Set automatically if  
the slave transmit FIFO is empty. Cleared  
automatically by writing to the I2C0STX register.  
Rev. A | Page 68 of 92  
 
ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27  
I2CxSRX Registers  
I2CxADR Registers  
Name  
Address  
Default Value  
0x00  
0x00  
Access  
Name  
Address  
Default Value  
0x00  
Access  
R/W  
I2C0SRX  
I2C1SRX  
0xFFFF0808  
0xFFFF0908  
R
R
I2C0ADR  
I2C1ADR  
0xFFFF081C  
0xFFFF091C  
0x00  
R/W  
I2CxSRX are receive registers for the slave channel.  
I2CxADR are master address byte registers. The I2CxADR  
value is the device address that the master wants to  
communicate with. It automatically transmits at the start of a  
master transfer sequence if there is no valid data in the  
I2CxMTX register when the master enable bit is set.  
I2CxSTX Registers  
Name  
Address  
Default Value  
0x00  
0x00  
Access  
W
W
I2C0STX  
I2C1STX  
0xFFFF080C  
0xFFFF090C  
I2CxBYTE Registers  
I2CxSTX are transmit registers for the slave channel.  
Name  
Address  
Default Value  
0x00  
0x00  
Access  
R/W  
R/W  
I2CxMRX Registers  
I2C0BYTE  
I2C1BYTE  
0xFFFF0824  
0xFFFF0924  
Name  
Address  
Default Value  
0x00  
0x00  
Access  
I2C0MRX  
I2C1MRX  
0xFFFF0810  
0xFFFF0910  
R
R
I2CxBYTE are broadcast byte registers. Data written to these  
register do not go through the TxFIFO. This data is transmitted  
at the start of a transfer sequence before the address. Once the  
byte has been transmitted and acknowledged, the I2C expects  
another byte written in I2CxBYTE or an address written to the  
address register.  
I2CxMRX are receive registers for the master channel.  
I2CxMTX Registers  
Name  
Address  
Default Value  
0x00  
0x00  
Access  
W
W
I2C0MTX  
I2C1MTX  
0xFFFF0814  
0xFFFF0914  
I2CxALT Registers  
Name  
Address  
Default Value  
0x00  
0x00  
Access  
R/W  
R/W  
I2CxMTXare transmit registers for the master channel.  
I2C0ALT  
I2C1ALT  
0xFFFF0828  
0xFFFF0928  
I2CxCNT Registers  
Name  
Address  
Default Value  
0x00  
0x00  
Access  
R/W  
R/W  
I2CxALT are hardware general call ID registers used in slave  
mode.  
I2C0CNT  
I2C1CNT  
0xFFFF0818  
0xFFFF0918  
I2CxCFG Registers  
I2CxCNT are 3-bit master receive data count registers. If a  
master read transfer sequence is initiated, then the I2CxCNT  
registers denote the number of bytes (−1) to be read from the  
slave device. By default, this counter is 0, which corresponds to  
1 byte expected.  
Name  
Address  
Default Value  
0x00  
0x00  
Access  
R/W  
R/W  
I2C0CFG  
I2C1CFG  
0xFFFF082C  
0xFFFF092C  
I2CxCFG are configuration registers.  
Rev. A | Page 69 of 92  
ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27  
Table 62. I2C0CFG MMR Bit Descriptions  
Bit  
31:5  
14  
Description  
Reserved. These bits should be written by the user as 0.  
Enable Stop Interrupt. Set by the user to generate an interrupt upon receiving a stop condition and after receiving a valid start  
condition + matching address. Cleared by the user to disable the generation of an interrupt upon receiving a stop condition.  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
Reserved.  
Reserved.  
Enable Stretch SCL (Holds SCL Low). Set by the user to stretch the SCL line. Cleared by the user to disable stretching of the SCL line.  
Reserved.  
Slave Tx FIFO Request Interrupt Enable. Set by the user to disable the slave Tx FIFO request interrupt. Cleared by the user to  
generate an interrupt request just after the negative edge of the clock for the R/W bit. This allows the user to input data into the  
slave Tx FIFO if it is empty. At 400 ksps and the core clock running at 41.78 MHz, the user has 45 clock cycles to take appropriate  
action, taking interrupt latency into account.  
8
7
6
5
4
General Call Status Bit Clear. Set by the user to clear the general call status bits. Cleared automatically by hardware after the general  
call status bits have been cleared.  
Master Serial Clock Enable Bit. Set by user to enable generation of the serial clock in master mode. Cleared by user to disable serial  
clock in master mode.  
Loop Back Enable Bit. Set by user to internally connect the transition to the reception to test user software. Cleared by user to  
operate in normal mode.  
Start Back-Off Disable Bit. Set by user in multimaster mode. If losing arbitration, the master immediately tries to retransmit. Cleared  
by user to enable start back-off. After losing arbitration, the master waits before trying to retransmit.  
Hardware General Call Enable. When this bit and the general call enable bit are set, and have received a general call (address 0x00)  
and a data byte, the device checks the contents of the I2C0ALT against the receive register. If they match, then the device has  
received a hardware general call. This is used if a device needs urgent attention from a master device without knowing which  
master it needs to turn to. This is a "to whom it may concern" call. The ADuC7019/7020/7021/7022/7024/7025/7026/7027 watch for  
these addresses. The device that requires attention embeds its own address into the message. All masters listen and the master  
that knows how to handle the device contacts its slave and acts appropriately. The LSB of the I2C0ALT register should always be  
written to a 1, as per I2C January 2000 specification.  
3
General Call Enable Bit. Set this bit to enable the slave device to ACK an I2C general call, address 0x00 (write). The device then  
recognizes a data bit. If it receives a 0x06 as the data byte, “Reset and write programmable part of slave address by hardware,” then  
the I2C interface resets as per the I2C January 2000 specification. This command can be used to reset an entire I2C system. The  
general call interrupt status bit sets on any general call. It is up to the user to take correct action by setting up the I2C interface after  
a reset. If it receives a 0x04 as the data byte, “Write programmable part of slave address by hardware,” then the general call interrupt  
status bit sets on any general call. It is up to the user to take correct action by reprogramming the device address.  
2
1
0
Reserved.  
Master Enable Bit. Set by user to enable the master I2C channel. Cleared by user to disable the master I2C channel.  
Slave Enable Bit. Set by user to enable the slave I2C channel. A slave transfer sequence is monitored for the device address in  
I2C0ID0, I2C0ID1, I2C0ID2, and I2C0ID3. If the device address is recognized, the part participates in the slave transfer sequence.  
Cleared by user to disable the slave I2C channel.  
I2CxDIV Registers  
I2CxID0, I2CxID1, I2CxID2, and I2CxID3 are slave address  
device ID registers of I2Cx.  
Name  
Address  
Default Value  
0x1F1F  
0x1F1F  
Access  
R/W  
R/W  
I2C0DIV  
I2C1DIV  
0xFFFF0830  
0xFFFF0930  
I2CxCCNT Registers  
Name  
Address  
Default Value  
0x01  
0x01  
Access  
R/W  
R/W  
I2CxDIV are the clock divider registers.  
I2C0CCNT  
I2C1CCNT  
0xFFFF0848  
0xFFFF0948  
I2CxIDx Registers  
Name  
Address  
Default Value  
0x00  
0x00  
0x00  
0x00  
0x00  
0x00  
0x00  
0x00  
Access  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
I2CxCCNT are 8-bit start/stop generation counters. They hold  
off SDA low for start and stop conditions.  
I2C0ID0  
I2C0ID1  
I2C0ID2  
I2C0ID3  
I2C1ID0  
I2C1ID1  
I2C1ID2  
I2C1ID3  
0xFFFF0838  
0xFFFF083C  
0xFFFF0840  
0xFFFF0844  
0xFFFF0938  
0xFFFF093C  
0xFFFF0940  
0xFFFF0944  
I2CxFSTA Registers  
Name  
Address  
Default Value  
0x0000  
0x0000  
Access  
I2C0FSTA  
I2C1FSTA  
0xFFFF084C  
0xFFFF094C  
R
R
I2CxFSTA are FIFO status registers.  
Rev. A | Page 70 of 92  
 
ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27  
Table 63. I2C0FSTA MMR Bit Descriptions  
In total, 30 GPIO pins are available on each ADuC7019/7020/  
7021/7022/7024/7025/7026/7027 for the PLA. These include 16  
input pins and 14 output pins, which need to be configured in  
the GPxCON register as PLA pins before using the PLA. Note  
that the comparator output is also included as one of the 16  
input pins.  
Bit  
15:0  
9
Value  
Description  
Reserved.  
Master Transmit FIFO Flush. Set by the user to  
flush the master Tx FIFO. Cleared automatically  
once the master Tx FIFO is flushed. This bit also  
flushes the slave receive FIFO.  
8
Slave Transmit FIFO Flush. Set by the user to  
flush the slave Tx FIFO. Cleared automatically  
once the slave Tx FIFO is flushed.  
Master Rx FIFO Status Bits.  
FIFO Empty.  
Byte Written to FIFO.  
1 Byte in FIFO.  
FIFO Full.  
Master Tx FIFO Status Bits.  
FIFO Empty.  
Byte Written to FIFO.  
1 Byte in FIFO.  
FIFO Full.  
Slave Rx FIFO Status Bits.  
FIFO Empty.  
Byte Written to FIFO.  
1 Byte in FIFO.  
FIFO Full.  
Slave Tx FIFO Status Bits.  
FIFO Empty.  
Byte Written to FIFO.  
1 Byte in FIFO.  
The PLA is configured via a set of user MMRs. The output(s) of  
the PLA can be routed to the internal interrupt system, to the  
signal of the ADC, to a MMR, or to any of the 16  
CONVSTART  
7:6  
PLA output pins.  
00  
01  
10  
11  
The two blocks can be interconnected as follows:  
Output of Element 15 (Block 1) can be fed back to Input 0 of  
Mux 0 of Element 0 (Block 0)  
5:4  
3:2  
1:0  
00  
01  
10  
11  
Output of Element 7 (Block 0) can be fed back to the Input 0  
of Mux 0 of Element 8 (Block 1)  
Table 64. Element Input/Output  
PLA Block 0  
PLA Block 1  
Input  
P3.0  
Element Input  
Output  
P1.7  
P0.4  
P0.5  
P0.6  
P0.7  
P2.0  
P2.1  
P2.2  
Element  
Output  
P4.0  
P4.1  
P4.2  
P4.3  
P4.4  
P4.5  
P4.6  
P4.7  
00  
01  
10  
11  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
P1.0  
P1.1  
P1.2  
P1.3  
P1.4  
P1.5  
P1.6  
P0.0  
8
9
P3.1  
P3.2  
P3.3  
P3.4  
P3.5  
P3.6  
P3.7  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
00  
01  
10  
11  
FIFO Full.  
PLA MMRs Interface  
The PLA peripheral interface consists of the 22 MMRs  
described in this section.  
PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC ARRAY (PLA)  
Every ADuC7019/7020/7021/7022/7024/7025/7026/7027  
integrates a fully programmable logic array (PLA), which  
consists of two independent but interconnected PLA blocks.  
Each block consists of eight PLA elements, which gives each  
part a total of 16 PLA elements.  
PLAELMx Registers  
Name  
Address  
Default Value  
0x0000  
0x0000  
0x0000  
0x0000  
0x0000  
0x0000  
0x0000  
0x0000  
0x0000  
0x0000  
0x0000  
0x0000  
0x0000  
0x0000  
0x0000  
0x0000  
Access  
PLAELM0  
PLAELM1  
PLAELM2  
PLAELM3  
PLAELM4  
PLAELM5  
PLAELM6  
PLAELM7  
PLAELM8  
PLAELM9  
PLAELM10  
PLAELM11  
PLAELM12  
PLAELM13  
PLAELM14  
PLAELM15  
0xFFFF0B00  
0xFFFF0B04  
0xFFFF0B08  
0xFFFF0B0C  
0xFFFF0B10  
0xFFFF0B14  
0xFFFF0B18  
0xFFFF0B1C  
0xFFFF0B20  
0xFFFF0B24  
0xFFFF0B28  
0xFFFF0B2C  
0xFFFF0B30  
0xFFFF0B34  
0xFFFF0B38  
0xFFFF0B3C  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
Each PLA element contains a two-input look-up table that can  
be configured to generate any logic output function based on  
two inputs and a flip-flop. This is represented in Figure 62.  
0
4
A
2
LOOK-UP  
TABLE  
B
3
1
Figure 62. PLA Element  
Rev. A | Page 71 of 92  
 
 
ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27  
PLAELMx are Element 0 to Element 15 control registers. They  
configure the input and output mux of each element, select the  
function in the look-up table, and bypass/use the flip-flop. See  
Table 65 and Table 67.  
PLACLK Register  
Name  
Address  
Default Value  
Access  
PLACLK  
0xFFFF0B40  
0x00  
R/W  
PLACLK is a clock selection for the flip-flops of Block 0 and  
clock selection for the flip-flops of Block 1.  
Table 65. PLAELMx MMR Bit Descriptions  
Bit  
Value Description  
Table 66. PLACLK MMR Bit Descriptions  
31:11  
10:9  
8:7  
Reserved.  
Mux (0) Control (see Table 67).  
Mux (1) Control (see Table 67).  
Mux (2) Control. Set by user to select the  
output of mux (0). Cleared by user to select  
the bit value from PLADIN.  
Mux (3) Control. Set by user to select the  
input pin of the particular element. Cleared  
by user to select the output of mux (1).  
Bit  
Value  
Description  
7
Reserved  
6:4  
Block 1 Clock Source Selection  
GPIO Clock on P0.5  
GPIO Clock on P0.0  
GPIO Clock on P0.7  
HCLK  
OCLK (32.768 kHz)  
Timer1 Overflow  
Reserved  
6
000  
001  
010  
011  
100  
101  
Other  
5
4:1  
Look-Up Table Control.  
0000  
0001  
0010  
0011  
0100  
0101  
0110  
0111  
1000  
1001  
1010  
1011  
1100  
1101  
1110  
1111  
0.  
NOR.  
3
Reserved  
B AND NOT A.  
NOT A.  
A AND NOT B.  
NOT B.  
EXOR.  
NAND.  
AND.  
EXNOR.  
B.  
NOT A OR B.  
A.  
A OR NOT B.  
OR.  
2:0  
Block 0 Clock Source Selection  
GPIO Clock on P0.5  
GPIO Clock on P0.0  
GPIO Clock on P0.7  
HCLK  
OCLK (32.768 kHz)  
Timer1 Overflow  
Reserved  
000  
001  
010  
011  
100  
101  
Other  
1.  
0
Mux (4) Control. Set by user to bypass the flip-  
flop. Cleared by user to select the flip-flop  
(cleared by default).  
Table 67. Feedback Configuration  
Bit  
Value  
PLAELM0  
Element 15  
Element 2  
Element 4  
Element 6  
Element 1  
Element 3  
Element 5  
Element 7  
PLAELM1 to PLAELM7  
Element 0  
Element 2  
Element 4  
Element 6  
Element 1  
Element 3  
Element 5  
Element 7  
PLAELM8  
PLAELM9 to PLAELM15  
10:9  
00  
01  
10  
11  
00  
01  
10  
11  
Element 7  
Element 10  
Element 12  
Element 14  
Element 9  
Element 11  
Element 13  
Element 15  
Element 8  
Element 10  
Element 12  
Element 14  
Element 9  
Element 11  
Element 13  
Element 15  
8:7  
Rev. A | Page 72 of 92  
 
 
 
ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27  
PLAIRQ Register  
PLADIN Register  
Name  
Address  
Default Value  
Access  
Name  
Address  
Default Value  
Access  
PLAIRQ  
0xFFFF0B44  
0x00000000  
R/W  
PLADIN  
0xFFFF0B4C  
0x00000000  
R/W  
PLAIRQ enables IRQ0 and/or IRQ1 and selects the source of  
the IRQ.  
PLADIN is a data input MMR for PLA.  
Table 70. PLADIN MMR Bit Descriptions  
Table 68. PLAIRQ MMR Bit Descriptions  
Bit  
Description  
Bit  
Value  
Description  
31:16  
15:0  
Reserved  
Input Bit to Element 15 to Element 0  
15:13  
12  
Reserved.  
PLA IRQ1 Enable Bit. Set by user to enable  
IRQ1 output from PLA. Cleared by user to  
disable IRQ1 output from PLA.  
PLADOUT Register  
Name  
Address  
Default Value  
Access  
11:8  
PLA IRQ1 Source.  
PLA Element 0.  
PLA Element 1.  
PLA Element 15.  
Reserved.  
PLA IRQ0 Enable Bit. Set by user to enable  
IRQ0 output from PLA. Cleared by user to  
disable IRQ0 output from PLA.  
PLA IRQ0 Source.  
PLA Element 0.  
PLA Element 1.  
PLA Element 15.  
PLADOUT  
0xFFFF0B50  
0x00000000  
R
0000  
0001  
1111  
PLADOUT is a data output MMR for PLA. This register is  
always updated.  
7:5  
4
Table 71. PLADOUT MMR Bit Descriptions  
Bit  
Description  
31:16  
15:0  
Reserved  
Output Bit from Element 15 to Element 0  
3:0  
0000  
0001  
1111  
PLALCK Register  
Name  
PLALCK  
Address  
Default Value  
Access  
0xFFFF0B54  
0x00  
W
PLALCK is a PLA lock option. Bit 0 is written only once. When  
set, it does not allow modifying any of the PLA MMR, except  
PLADIN. A PLA tool is provided in the development system to  
easily configure the PLA.  
PLAADC Register  
Name  
Address  
Default Value  
Access  
PLAADC  
0xFFFF0B48  
0x00000000  
R/W  
PLAADC is a PLA source from the ADC start conversion  
signal.  
Table 69. PLAADC MMR Bit Descriptions  
Bit  
31:5  
4
Value Description  
Reserved.  
ADC Start Conversion Enable Bit. Set by user  
to enable ADC start conversion from PLA.  
Cleared by user to disable ADC start  
conversion from PLA.  
3:0  
ADC Start Conversion Source.  
PLA Element 0.  
PLA Element 1.  
0000  
0001  
1111  
PLA Element 15.  
Rev. A | Page 73 of 92  
 
ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27  
PROCESSOR REFERENCE PERIPHERALS  
IRQSTA Register  
INTERRUPT SYSTEM  
Name  
Address  
Default Value  
Access  
There are 23 interrupt sources on the ADuC7019/7020/  
7021/7022/7024/7025/7026/7027 that are controlled by the  
interrupt controller. Most interrupts are generated from the on-  
chip peripherals, such as ADC and UART. Four additional  
interrupt sources are generated from external interrupt request  
pins, IRQ0, IRQ1, IRQ2, and IRQ3. The ARM7TDMI CPU core  
only recognizes interrupts as one of two types, a normal  
interrupt request IRQ or a fast interrupt request FIQ. All the  
interrupts can be masked separately.  
IRQSTA  
0xFFFF0000  
0x00000000  
R
IRQSTA (read-only register) provides the current enabled IRQ  
source status. When set to 1 that source should generate an  
active IRQ request to the ARM7TDMI core. There is no priority  
encoder or interrupt vector generation. This function is  
implemented in software in a common interrupt handler  
routine. All 32 bits are logically ORed to create the IRQ signal  
to the ARM7TDMI core.  
IRQSIG Register  
The control and configuration of the interrupt system is  
managed through nine interrupt-related registers, four  
dedicated to IRQ, and four dedicated to FIQ. An additional  
MMR is used to select the programmed interrupt source. The  
bits in each IRQ and FIQ registers (except for Bit 23) represent  
the same interrupt source as described in Table 72.  
Name  
Address  
Default Value  
Access  
IRQSIG  
0xFFFF0004  
0x00XXX000  
R
IRQSIG reflects the status of the different IRQ sources. If a  
peripheral generates an IRQ signal, then the corresponding bit  
in the IRQSIG is set; otherwise it is cleared. The IRQSIG bits are  
cleared when the interrupt in the particular peripheral is  
cleared. All IRQ sources can be masked in the IRQEN MMR.  
IRQSIG is read-only.  
Table 72. IRQ/FIQ MMRs Bit Description  
Bit  
Description  
All Interrupts OR’ed  
SWI  
0
1
IRQEN Register  
2
Timer0  
Name  
Address  
Default Value  
Access  
3
Timer1  
IRQEN  
0xFFFF0008  
0x00000000  
R/W  
4
5
6
7
Wake-Up Timer – Timer2  
Watchdog Timer – Timer3  
Flash Control  
ADC Channel  
PLL Lock  
IRQEN provides the value of the current enable mask. When bit  
is set to 1, the source request is enabled to create an IRQ  
exception. When bit is set to 0, the source request is disabled or  
masked, which does not create an IRQ exception.  
8
9
I2C0 Slave  
IRQCLR Register  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
I2C0 Master  
I2C1 Master  
SPI Slave  
SPI Master  
UART  
External IRQ0  
Comparator  
PSM  
External IRQ1  
PLA IRQ0  
Name  
Address  
Default Value  
Access  
IRQCLR  
0xFFFF000C  
0x00000000  
W
IRQCLR (write-only register) clears the IRQEN register in  
order to mask an interrupt source. Each bit set to 1 clears the  
corresponding bit in the IRQEN register without affecting the  
remaining bits. The pair of registers, IRQEN and IRQCLR,  
independently manipulates the enable mask without requiring  
an atomic read-modify-write.  
FIQ  
PLA IRQ1  
The fast interrupt request (FIQ) is the exception signal to enter  
the FIQ mode of the processor. It is provided to service data  
transfer or communication channel tasks with low latency. The  
FIQ interface is identical to the IRQ interface providing the  
second-level interrupt (highest priority). Four 32-bit registers  
are dedicated to FIQ: FIQSIG, FIQEN, FIQCLR, and FIQSTA.  
External IRQ2  
External IRQ3  
PWM Trip (IRQ only)/ PWM Sync (FIQ only)  
IRQ  
The interrupt request (IRQ) is the exception signal to enter the  
IRQ mode of the processor. It is used to service general-  
purpose interrupt handling of internal and external events.  
The four 32-bit registers dedicated to IRQ are: IRQSTA,  
IRQSIG, IRQEN, and IRQCLR.  
Rev. A | Page 74 of 92  
 
 
 
 
ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27  
FIQSTA Register  
TIMERS  
Name  
Address  
Default Value  
Access  
The ADuC7019/7020/7021/7022/7024/7025/7026/7027 have  
four general-purpose timer/counters:  
FIQSTA  
0xFFFF0100  
0x00000000  
R
Timer0  
FIQSIG Register  
Name  
Address  
Default Value  
Access  
Timer1  
FIQSIG  
0xFFFF0104  
0x00XXX000  
R
Timer2 or Wake-Up Timer  
Timer3 or Watchdog Timer  
FIQEN Register  
Name  
Address  
Default Value  
Access  
FIQEN  
0xFFFF0108  
0x00000000  
R/W  
These four timers in their normal mode of operation can be  
either free-running or periodic.  
FIQCLR Register  
Name  
Address  
Default Value  
Access  
In free-running mode, the counter decreases from the  
maximum value until zero scale and starts again at the  
minimum value. (It also increases from the minimum value  
until full scale and starts again at the maximum value.)  
FIQCLR  
0xFFFF010C  
0x00000000  
W
Bit 31 to Bit 1 of FIQSTA are logically OR’ed to create the FIQ  
signal to the core and Bit 0 of both the FIQ and IRQ registers  
(FIQ source).  
In periodic mode, the counter decrements/increments from the  
value in the load register (T×LD MMR) until zero/full scale and  
starts again at the value stored in the load register.  
The logic for FIQEN and FIQCLR does not allow an interrupt  
source to be enabled in both IRQ and FIQ masks. A bit set to 1  
in FIQEN does, as a side effect, clear the same bit in IRQEN.  
Also, a bit set to 1 in IRQEN does, as a side effect, clear the  
same bit in FIQEN. An interrupt source can be disabled in both  
IRQEN and FIQEN masks.  
The timer interval is calculated as follow:  
(
T × LD  
)
× prescaler  
Interval =  
source clock  
The value of a counter can be read at any time by accessing  
its value register (T×VAL). Note that when a timer is being  
clocked from a clock other than core clock, an incorrect value  
could be read (due to asynchronous clock system). In this  
configuration, T×VAL should always be read twice. If the two  
readings are different, then it should be read a third time to  
get the correct value.  
Programmed Interrupts  
Because the programmed interrupts are nonmaskable, they are  
controlled by another register, SWICFG, which simultaneously  
writes into the IRQSTA and IRQSIG registers, and/or the  
FIQSTA and FIQSIG registers. The 32-bit register dedicated to  
software interrupt is SWICFG described in Table 73. This MMR  
allows the control of programmed source interrupt.  
Timers are started by writing in the control register of the  
corresponding timer (T×CON).  
SWICFG Register  
Name  
Address  
Default Value  
Access  
SWICFG  
0xFFFF0010  
0x00000000  
W
In normal mode, an IRQ is generated each time the value of the  
counter reaches zero when counting down. It is also generated  
each time the counter value reaches full scale when counting  
up. An IRQ can be cleared by writing any value to clear the  
register of that particular timer (T×CLRI).  
Table 73. SWICFG MMR Bit Descriptions  
Bit  
31:3  
2
Description  
Reserved.  
Programmed Interrupt-FIQ. Setting/Clearing this bit  
corresponds with setting/clearing Bit 1 of FIQSTA  
and FIQSIG.  
Programmed Interrupt-IRQ. Setting/Clearing this bit  
corresponds with setting/clearing Bit 1 of IRQSTA  
and IRQSIG.  
When using an asynchronous clock-to-clock timer, the interrupt  
in the timer block could take more time to clear than the time it  
takes for the code in the interrupt routine to execute. Ensure that  
the interrupt signal is cleared before leaving the interrupt service  
routine. This can be done by checking the IRQSTA MMR.  
1
0
Reserved.  
Note that any interrupt signal must be active for at least the  
equivalent of the interrupt latency time, to be detected by the  
interrupt controller and to be detected by the user in the  
IRQSTA/FIQSTA register.  
Rev. A | Page 75 of 92  
 
 
ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27  
Timer0 (RTOS Timer)  
T0CLRI Register  
Name  
Address  
Default Value  
Access  
Timer0 is a general-purpose, 16-bit timer (count-down) with a  
programmable prescaler (see Figure 63). The prescaler source is  
the core clock frequency (HCLK) and can be scaled by factors  
of 1, 16, or 256.  
T0CLRI  
0xFFFF030C  
0xFF  
W
T0CLRI is an 8-bit register. Writing any value to this register  
clears the interrupt.  
16-BIT  
LOAD  
Timer1 (General-Purpose Timer)  
Timer1 is a general-purpose, 32-bit timer (count down or count  
up) with a programmable prescaler. The source can be the  
32 kHz external crystal, the core clock frequency, or an external  
GPIO, P1.0 or P0.6. This source can be scaled by a factor of 1,  
16, 256, or 32768.  
16-BIT  
PRESCALER  
/1, 16 OR 256  
TIMER0 IRQ  
DOWN  
HCLK  
COUNTER  
ADC CONVERSION  
TIMER0  
VALUE  
Figure 63. Timer0 Block Diagram  
The counter can be formatted as a standard 32-bit value or as  
Hours: Minutes: Seconds: Hundredths.  
Timer0s interface consists of four MMRS: T0LD, T0VAL,  
T0CON, and T0CLRI.  
Timer1 has a capture register (T1CAP), which can be triggered  
by a selected IRQ source initial assertion. This feature can be  
used to determine the assertion of an event more accurately  
than the precision allowed by the RTOS timer when the IRQ is  
serviced.  
T0LD Register  
Name  
Address  
Default Value  
Access  
T0LD  
0xFFFF0300  
0x0000  
R/W  
T0LD is a 16-bit load register.  
Timer1 can be used to start ADC conversions as shown in the  
block diagram in Figure 64.  
T0VAL Register  
Name  
Address  
Default Value  
Access  
32-BIT  
LOAD  
T0VAL  
0xFFFF0304  
0xFFFF  
R
T0VAL is a 16-bit read-only register representing the current  
state of the counter.  
32kHz OSCILLATOR  
PRESCALER  
/1, 16, 256  
OR 32768  
32-BIT  
UP/DOWN  
COUNTER  
HCLK  
P0.6  
P1.0  
TIMER1 IRQ  
ADC CONVERSION  
T0CON Register  
TIMER1  
VALUE  
Name  
Address  
Default Value  
Access  
T0CON  
0xFFFF0308  
0x0000  
R/W  
CAPTURE  
IRQ[31:0]  
T0CON is the configuration MMR described in Table 74.  
Figure 64. Timer1 Block Diagram  
Table 74. T0CON MMR Bit Descriptions  
Timer1s interface consists of five MMRS: T1LD, T1VAL,  
T1CON, T1CLRI, and T1CAP.  
Bit  
31:8  
7
Value Description  
Reserved.  
Timer0 Enable Bit. Set by user to enable Timer0.  
T1LD Register  
Cleared by user to disable Timer0 by default.  
Name  
Address  
Default Value  
Access  
6
Timer0 Mode. Set by user to operate in  
periodic mode. Cleared by user to operate in  
free-running mode. Default mode.  
T1LD  
0xFFFF0320  
0x00000000  
R/W  
T1LD is a 16-bit load register.  
5:4  
3:2  
Reserved.  
Prescale.  
T1VAL Register  
Name  
Address  
Default Value  
Access  
00  
01  
10  
11  
Core Clock/1. Default value.  
Core Clock/16.  
Core Clock/256.  
Undefined. Equivalent to 00.  
Reserved.  
T1VAL  
0xFFFF0324  
0xFFFFFFFF  
R
T1VAL is a 16-bit read-only register that represents the current  
state of the counter.  
1:0  
T1CON Register  
Name  
Address  
Default Value  
Access  
T1CON  
0xFFFF0328  
0x0000  
R/W  
T1CON is the configuration MMR described in Table 75.  
Rev. A | Page 76 of 92  
 
 
 
 
ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27  
Table 75. T1CON MMR Bit Descriptions  
T1CAP Register  
Bit  
Value Description  
Name  
Address  
Default Value  
Access  
31:18  
17  
Reserved.  
T1CAP  
0xFFFF0330  
0x00000000  
R
Event Select Bit. Set by user to enable time  
capture of an event. Cleared by user to  
disable time capture of an event  
Event Select Range, 0 to 31. These events are  
as described in Table 72. All events are offset  
by two, that is, event 2 in Table 72 becomes  
event zero for the purposes of Timer1.  
Clock Select.  
Core Clock (HCLK).  
External 32.768 kHz Crystal.  
P1.0 Raising Edge Triggered.  
P0.6 Raising Edge Triggered.  
Count Up. Set by user for Timer1 to count up.  
Cleared by user for Timer1 to count down by  
default.  
Timer1 enable bit. Set by user to enable  
Timer1. Cleared by user to disable Timer1 by  
default.  
Timer1 Mode. Set by user to operate in  
periodic mode. Cleared by user to operate in  
free-running mode. Default mode.  
T1CAP is a 32-bit register. It holds the value contained in  
T1VAL when a particular event occurred. This event must be  
selected in T1CON.  
16:12  
11:9  
Timer2 (Wake-Up Timer)  
Timer2 is a 32-bit wake-up timer (count-down or count-up)  
with a programmable prescaler. The source can be the 32 kHz  
external crystal, the core clock frequency, or the internal 32 kHz  
oscillator. The clock source can be scaled by a factor of 1, 16,  
256, or 32,768. The wake-up timer continues to run when the  
core clock is disabled.  
000  
001  
010  
011  
8
7
6
The counter can be formatted as plain 32-bit value or as  
Hours: Minutes: Seconds: Hundredths.  
Timer2 can be used to start ADC conversions as shown in the  
block diagram Figure 65.  
32-BIT  
LOAD  
INTERNAL  
OSCILLATOR  
5:4  
00  
01  
10  
11  
3:0  
Format.  
Binary.  
Reserved.  
PRESCALER  
/1, 16, 256  
OR 32768  
32-BIT  
UP/DOWN  
COUNTER  
EXTERNAL  
CRYSTAL  
TIMER2 IRQ  
HCLK  
Hr:Min:Sec:Hundredths (23 hours to 0 hour).  
Hr:Min:Sec:Hundredths (255 hours to 0 hour).  
Prescale:  
TIMER2  
VALUE  
Figure 65. Timer2 Block Diagram  
0000  
0100  
1000  
1111  
Source Clock/1.  
Source Clock/16.  
Source Clock/256.  
Source Clock/32768.  
Timer2 interface consists in four MMRS: T2LD, T2VAL,  
T2CON, and T2CLRI.  
T2LD Register  
Name  
Address  
Default Value  
Access  
T2LD  
0xFFFF0340  
0x00000000  
R/W  
T1CLRI Register  
Name  
Address  
Default Value  
Access  
T2LD is a 16-bit register load register.  
T1CLRI  
0xFFFF032C  
0xFF  
W
T2VAL Register  
T1CLRI is an 8-bit register. Writing any value to this register  
clears the Timer1 interrupt.  
Name  
Address  
Default Value  
Access  
T2VAL  
0xFFFF0344  
0xFFFFFFFF  
R
T2VAL is a 16-bit read-only register that represents the current  
state of the counter.  
Rev. A | Page 77 of 92  
 
 
 
ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27  
16-BIT  
LOAD  
T2CON Register  
Name  
Address  
Default Value  
Access  
WATCHDOG  
RESET  
16-BIT  
UP/DOWN  
COUNTER  
T2CON  
0xFFFF0348  
0x0000  
R/W  
PRESCALER  
/1, 16 OR 256  
32.768kHz  
TIMER3 IRQ  
T2CON is the configuration MMR described in Table 76.  
Table 76. T2CON MMR Bit Descriptions  
TIMER3  
VALUE  
Bit  
Value Description  
Figure 66. Timer3 Block Diagram  
31:11  
10:9  
Reserved.  
Clock Source.  
Watchdog Mode  
00  
01  
10  
11  
External Crystal.  
External Crystal.  
Internal Oscillator.  
Core Clock (41 MHz/2CD).  
Watchdog mode is entered by setting Bit 5 in T3CON MMR.  
Timer3 decreases from the value present in T3LD register until  
zero. T3LD is used as timeout. The maximum timeout can be  
512 seconds using the prescaler/256, and full-scale in T3LD.  
Timer3 is clocked by the internal 32 kHz crystal when  
operating in the watchdog mode. Note that to enter watchdog  
mode successfully, Bit 5 in the T3CON MMR must be set after  
writing to the T3LD MMR.  
8
Count Up. Set by user for Timer2 to count up.  
Cleared by user for Timer2 to count down by  
default.  
7
6
Timer2 Enable Bit. Set by user to enable Timer2.  
Cleared by user to disable Timer2 by default.  
Timer2 Mode. Set by user to operate in  
periodic mode. Cleared by user to operate in  
free-running mode. Default mode.  
If the timer reaches 0, a reset or an interrupt occurs, depending  
on Bit 1 in T3CON register. To avoid reset or interrupt, any value  
must be written to T3ICLR before the expiration period. This  
reloads the counter with T3LD and begins a new timeout period.  
5:4  
Format.  
00  
01  
10  
11  
Binary.  
Reserved.  
As soonas watchdog mode is entered, T3LD and T3CON are  
write-protected. These two registers cannot be modified until a  
reset clears the watchdog enable bit, which causes Timer3 to  
exit watchdog mode.  
Hr:Min:Sec:Hundredths (23 hours to 0 hour).  
Hr:Min:Sec:Hundredths (255 hours to 0 hour).  
Prescale:  
3:0  
0000  
0100  
1000  
1111  
Source Clock/1 by Default.  
Source Clock/16.  
Source Clock/256 Expected for Format 2 and 3.  
Source Clock/32768.  
The Timer3 interface consists of four MMRS: T3LD, T3VAL,  
T3CON, and T3CLRI.  
T3LD Register  
Name  
Address  
Default Value  
Access  
T2CLRI Register  
T3LD  
0xFFFF0360  
0x0000  
R/W  
Name  
Address  
Default Value  
Access  
T3LD is a 16-bit register load register.  
T2CLRI  
0xFFFF034C  
0xFF  
W
T2CLRI is an 8-bit register. Writing any value to this register  
clears the Timer2 interrupt.  
T3VAL Register  
Name  
Address  
Default Value  
Access  
T3VAL  
0xFFFF0364  
0xFFFF  
R
Timer3 (Watchdog Time)  
T3VAL is a 16-bit read-only register that represents the current  
state of the counter.  
Timer3 has two modes of operation, normal mode and  
watchdog mode. The watchdog timer is used to recover from  
an illegal software state. Once enabled, it requires periodic  
servicing to prevent it from forcing a reset of the processor.  
T3CON Register  
Name  
Address  
Default Value  
Access  
T3CON  
0xFFFF0368  
0x0000  
R/W  
Normal Mode  
T3CON is the configuration MMR described in Table 77.  
Timer3 in normal mode is identical to Timer0, except for the  
clock source and the count-up functionality. The clock source is  
32 kHz from the PLL and can be scaled by a factor of 1, 16, or  
256 (see Figure 66).  
Rev. A | Page 78 of 92  
 
 
 
ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27  
Table 77. T3CON MMR Bit Descriptions  
The value 0×00 should not be used as an initial seed due to the  
properties of the polynomial. The value 0×00 is always  
guaranteed to force an immediate reset. The value of the LFSR  
cannot be read; it must be tracked/generated in software.  
Bit  
31:9  
8
Value  
Description  
Reserved.  
Count Up. Set by user for Timer3 to count up.  
Cleared by user for Timer3 to count down by  
default.  
Example of a sequence:  
7
Timer3 Enable Bit. Set by user to enable  
Timer3. Cleared by user to disable Timer3 by  
default.  
1. Enter initial seed, 0×AA, in T3ICLR before starting Timer3  
in watchdog mode.  
2. Enter 0×AA in T3ICLR; Timer3 is reloaded.  
3. Enter 0×37 in T3ICLR; Timer3 is reloaded.  
4. Enter 0×6E in T3ICLR; Timer3 is reloaded.  
5. Enter 0×66. 0×DC was expected; the watchdog reset the chip.  
6
Timer3 Mode. Set by user to operate in  
periodic mode. Cleared by user to operate  
in free-running mode. Default mode.  
Watchdog Mode Enable Bit. Set by user to  
enable watchdog mode. Cleared by user to  
disable watchdog mode by default.  
Secure Clear Bit. Set by user to use the secure  
clear option. Cleared by user to disable the  
secure clear option by default.  
Prescale:  
Source Clock/1 by Default.  
Source Clock/16.  
Source Clock/256.  
Undefined. Equivalent to 00.  
Watchdog IRQ Option Bit. Set by user to  
produce an IRQ instead of a reset when  
the watchdog reaches 0. Cleared by user to  
disable the IRQ option.  
5
EXTERNAL MEMORY INTERFACING  
4
The ADuC7026 and ADuC7027 are the only models in their  
series that feature an external memory interface The external  
memory interface requires a larger number of pins. This is why  
it is only available on larger pin count packages. The XMCFG  
MMR must be set to 1 to use the external port.  
3:2  
00  
01  
10  
11  
Although 32-bit addresses are supported internally, only the  
lower 16 bits of the address are on external pins.  
1
0
The memory interface can address up to four 128 kB of  
asynchronous memory (SRAM or/and EEPROM).  
Reserved.  
The pins required for interfacing to an external memory are  
shown in Table 78.  
T3CLRI Register  
Table 78. External Memory Interfacing Pins  
Name  
Address  
Default Value  
Access  
Pin  
Function  
T3CLRI  
0xFFFF036C  
0x00  
W
AD[15:0]  
A16  
MS[3:0]  
WR  
Address/Data Bus  
Extended Addressing for 8-Bit Memory Only  
Memory Select Pins  
Write Strobe  
T3CLRI is an 8-bit register. Writing any value to this register  
clears the Timer3 interrupt in normal mode or resets a new  
timeout period in watchdog mode.  
RS  
Read Strobe  
Secure Clear Bit (Watchdog Mode Only)  
AE  
BHE, BLE  
Address Latch Enable  
Byte Write Capability  
The secure clear bit is provided for a higher level of protection.  
When set, a specific sequential value must be written to T3ICLR  
to avoid a watchdog reset. The value is a sequence generated by  
the 8-bit linear feedback shift register (LFSR) polynomial = X8  
+ X6 + X5 + X + 1 as shown in Figure 67.  
There are four external memory regions available as described  
in Table 79. Associated with each region are the pins MS[3:0].  
These signals allow access to the particular region of external  
memory. The size of each memory region can be 128 kB maxi-  
mum, 64 k × 16 or 128 k × 8. To access 128 k with an 8-bit  
memory, an extra address line (A16) is provided. (See the  
example in Figure 68.) The four regions are configured  
independently.  
Q
D
Q
D
Q
D
Q
D
Q
D
Q
D
Q
D
Q
D
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
CLOCK  
Figure 67. 8-Bit LFSR  
Table 79. Memory Regions  
Address Start  
0x10000000  
0x20000000  
0x30000000  
0x40000000  
Address End  
0x1000FFFF  
0x2000FFFF  
0x3000FFFF  
0x4000FFFF  
Contents  
The initial value or seed is written to T3ICLR before entering  
watchdog mode. After entering watchdog mode, a write to  
T3ICLR must match this expected value. If it matches, the  
LFSR is advanced to the next state when the counter reload  
happens. If it fails to match the expected state, reset is  
immediately generated, even if the count has not yet expired.  
External Memory 0  
External Memory 1  
External Memory 2  
External Memory 3  
Each external memory region can be controlled through three  
MMRs: XMCFG, XMxCON, and XMxPAR.  
Rev. A | Page 79 of 92  
 
 
 
 
ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27  
EPROM  
64k × 16-BIT  
ADuC7026/  
XMxPAR Registers  
ADuC7027  
Name  
Address  
Default Value  
0x70FF  
0x70FF  
0x70FF  
0x70FF  
Access  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
A16  
XM0PAR  
XM1PAR  
XM2PAR  
XM3PAR  
0xFFFFF020  
0xFFFFF024  
0xFFFFF028  
0xFFFFF02C  
AD15:0  
D0–D15  
A0:15  
LATCH  
AE  
MS0  
MS1  
CS  
XMxPAR are registers that define the protocol used for  
accessing the external memory for each memory region.  
WS  
RS  
WE  
OE  
Table 81. XMxPAR MMR Bit Descriptions  
Bit  
Description  
RAM  
128k × 8-BIT  
15  
Enable Byte Write Strobe. This bit is only used for two, 8-  
bit memory sharing the same memory region. Set by  
the user to gate the A0 output with the WR output. This  
allows byte write capability without using BHE and BLE  
signals. Cleared by user to use BHE and BLE signals.  
Number of wait states on the address latch enable  
strobe.  
D0–D7  
A16  
A0:15  
CS  
WE  
OE  
14:12  
Figure 68. Interfacing to External EPROM/RAM  
11  
10  
Reserved.  
Extra Address Hold Time. Set by the user to disable extra  
hold time. Cleared by the user to enable one clock cycle  
of hold on the address in read and write.  
XMCFG Register  
Name  
Address  
Default Value  
Access  
XMCFG  
0xFFFFF000  
0x00  
R/W  
9
8
Extra bus transition time on read. Set by the user to disable  
extra bus transition time. Cleared by the user to enable  
one extra clock before and after the read strobe (RS).  
Extra Bus Transition Time On Write. Set by the user to  
disable extra bus transition time. Cleared by the user to  
enable one extra clock before and after the write strobe  
(WS).  
Number of Write Wait States. Select the number of wait  
states added to the length of the WS pulse. 0x0 is 1clock;  
0xF is 16 clock cycles (default value).  
Number of Read Wait States. Select the number of wait  
states added to the length of the RS pulse. 0x0 is 1 clock;  
0xF is 16 clock cycles (default value).  
XMCFG is set to 1 to enable external memory access. This must  
be set to 1 before any port pins function as external memory  
access pins. The port pins must also be individually enabled via  
the GPxCON MMR.  
XMxCON Registers  
Name  
7:4  
3:0  
Address  
Default Value  
0x00  
0x00  
0x00  
0x00  
Access  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
XM0CON  
XM1CON  
XM2CON  
XM3CON  
0xFFFFF010  
0xFFFFF014  
0xFFFFF018  
0xFFFFF01C  
Figure 69, Figure 70, Figure 71, and Figure 72 show the timing  
for a read cycle, a read cycle with address hold and bus turn  
cycles, a write cycle with address and write hold cycles, and a  
write cycle with wait sates, respectively.  
XMxCON are the control registers for each memory region.  
They allow the enabling/disabling of a memory region and  
control the data bus width of the memory region.  
Table 80. XMxCON MMR Bit Descriptions  
Bit Description  
1
Selects Between 8-Bit and 16-Bit Data Bus Width. Set by the  
user to select a 16-bit data bus. Cleared by the user to  
select an 8-bit data bus.  
0
Enables Memory Region. Set by the user to enable memory  
region. Cleared by the user to disable the memory region.  
Rev. A | Page 80 of 92  
 
 
 
ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27  
MCLK  
AD16:0  
MSx  
ADDRESS  
DATA  
AE  
RS  
Figure 69. External Memory Read Cycle  
MCLK  
AD16:0  
ADDRESS  
DATA  
EXTRA ADDRESS  
HOLD TIME  
(BIT-10)  
MSx  
AE  
RS  
BUS TURN OUT CYCLE  
(BIT-9)  
BUS TURN OUT CYCLE  
(BIT-9)  
Figure 70. External Memory Read Cycle with Address Hold and Bus Turn Cycles  
Rev. A | Page 81 of 92  
 
 
ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27  
MCLK  
AD16:0  
ADDRESS  
DATA  
EXTRA ADDRESS  
HOLD TIME  
(BIT-10)  
MSx  
AE  
WS  
WRITE HOLD ADDRESS  
AND DATA CYCLES  
(BIT-8)  
WRITE HOLD ADDRESS  
AND DATA CYCLES  
(BIT-8)  
Figure 71. External Memory Write Cycle with Address and Write Hold Cycles  
MCLK  
AD16:0  
ADDRESS  
DATA  
MSx  
AE  
1 ADDRESS WAIT STATE  
(BIT-14 TO BIT-12)  
WS  
1 WRITE STROBE WAIT STATE  
(BIT-7 TO BIT-4)  
Figure 72. External Memory Write Cycle with Wait States  
Rev. A | Page 82 of 92  
 
 
ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27  
HARDWARE DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS  
Notice that in both Figure 73 and Figure 74, a large value  
(10 μF) reservoir capacitor sits on IOVDD, and a separate 10 μF  
capacitor sits on AVDD. In addition, local small-value (0.1 μF)  
capacitors are located at each AVDD and IOVDD pin of the chip.  
As per standard design practice, be sure to include all of these  
capacitors and ensure the smaller capacitors are close to each  
AVDD pin with trace lengths as short as possible. Connect the  
ground terminal of each of these capacitors directly to the  
underlying ground plane. Finally, note that the analog and  
digital ground pins on the ADuC7019/7020/7021/7022/  
7024/7025/7026/7027 must be referenced to the same system  
ground reference point at all times.  
POWER SUPPLIES  
The ADuC7019/7020/7021/7022/7024/7025/7026/7027  
operational power supply voltage range is 2.7 V to 3.6 V.  
Separate analog and digital power supply pins (AVDD and  
IOVDD, respectively) allow AVDD to be kept relatively free of  
noisy digital signals often present on the system IOVDD line. In  
this mode, the part can also operate with split supplies, that is,  
using different voltage levels for each supply. For example, the  
system can be designed to operate with an IOVDD voltage level  
of 3.3 V while the AVDD level can be at 3 V, or vice versa. A  
typical split supply configuration is shown in Figure 73.  
DIGITAL  
SUPPLY  
ANALOG  
SUPPLY  
Linear Voltage Regulator  
+
+
10  
μF  
10μF  
Each ADuC7019/7020/7021/7022/7024/7025/7026/7027  
requires a single 3.3 V supply, but the core logic requires a 2.6 V  
supply. An on-chip linear regulator generates the 2.6 V from  
IOVDD for the core logic. LVDD Pin 21 is the 2.6 V supply for the  
core logic. An external compensation capacitor of 0.47 μF must  
be connected between LVDD and DGND (as close as possible to  
these pins) to act as a tank of charge as shown Figure 75.  
ADuC7026  
73  
74  
75  
26  
54  
AV  
DD  
DD  
IOV  
DD  
DACV  
0.1  
μF  
0.1μF  
8
GND  
REF  
70  
71  
67  
DACGND  
AGND  
25  
53  
IOGND  
REFGND  
ADuC7026  
Figure 73. External Dual Supply Connections  
27  
LV  
DD  
As an alternative to providing two separate power supplies, the  
user can reduce noise on AVDD by placing a small series resistor  
and/or ferrite bead between AVDD and IOVDD, and then  
decouple AVDD separately to ground. An example of this  
configuration is shown in Figure 74. With this configuration,  
other analog circuitry (such as op amps, voltage reference, and  
others) can be powered from the AVDD supply line as well.  
0.47μF  
28  
DGND  
Figure 75. Voltage Regulator Connections  
BEAD  
DIGITAL SUPPLY  
1.6Ω  
The LVDD pin should not be used for any other chip. It is also  
recommended to use excellent power supply decoupling on  
IOVDD to help improve line regulation performance of the on-  
chip voltage regulator.  
10μF  
10μF  
+
ADuC7026  
73  
26  
54  
AV  
74  
75  
DD  
DD  
IOV  
DD  
DACV  
0.1μF  
0.1μF  
8
GND  
REF  
DACGND 70  
71  
67  
25  
53  
AGND  
IOGND  
REFGND  
Figure 74. External Single Supply Connections  
Rev. A | Page 83 of 92  
 
 
 
 
 
ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27  
For example, do not power components on the analog side, as  
seen in Figure 76b, with IOVDD because that would force return  
currents from IOVDD to flow through AGND. Also, avoid digital  
currents flowing under analog circuitry, which could occur if a  
noisy digital chip is placed on the left half of the board shown in  
Figure 76c. If possible, avoid large discontinuities in the ground  
plane(s) (such as those formed by a long trace on the same  
layer), because they force return signals to travel a longer path.  
In addition, make all connections to the ground plane directly,  
with little or no trace separating the pin from its via to ground.  
GROUNDING AND BOARD LAYOUT  
RECOMMENDATIONS  
As with all high resolution data converters, special attention  
must be paid to grounding and PC board layout of  
ADuC7019/7020/7021/7022/7024/7025/7026/7027-based  
designs in order to achieve optimum performance from the  
ADCs and DAC.  
Although the ADuC7019/7020/7021/7022/7024/7025/7026/7027  
have separate pins for analog and digital ground (AGND and  
IOGND), the user must not tie these to two separate ground  
planes unless the two ground planes are connected very close to  
the part. This is illustrated in the simplified example shown in  
Figure 76a. In systems where digital and analog ground planes  
are connected together somewhere else (at the system’s power  
supply, for example), the planes cannot be reconnected near the  
part, because a ground loop would result. In these cases, tie all the  
ADuC7019/7020/7021/7022/7024/7025/7026/7027’s AGND and  
IOGND pins to the analog ground plane, as illustrated in Figure  
76b. In systems with only one ground plane, ensure that the  
digital and analog components are physically separated onto  
separate halves of the board so that digital return currents do not  
flow near analog circuitry and vice versa. The ADuC7019/7020/  
7021/7022/7024/7025/7026/7027 can then be placed between the  
digital and analog sections, as illustrated in Figure 76c.  
When connecting fast logic signals (rise/fall time < 5 ns) to any  
of the ADuC7019/7020/7021/7022/7024/7025/7026/7027s  
digital inputs, add a series resistor to each relevant line to keep  
rise and fall times longer than 5 ns at the ADuC7019/7020/  
7021/7022/7024/7025/7026/7027 input pins. A value of 100 Ω  
or 200 Ω is usually sufficient enough to prevent high speed  
signals from coupling capacitively into the part and affecting  
the accuracy of ADC conversions.  
CLOCK OSCILLATOR  
The clock source for the ADuC7019/7020/7021/7022/  
7024/7025/7026/7027 can be generated by the internal PLL or  
by an external clock input. To use the internal PLL, connect a  
32.768 kHz parallel resonant crystal between XCLKI and  
XCLKO, and connect a capacitor from each pin to ground as  
shown Figure 77. This crystal allows the PLL to lock correctly to  
give a frequency of 41.78 MHz. If no external crystal is present,  
the internal oscillator is used to give a frequency of 41.78 MHz  
±3ꢀ typically.  
PLACE ANALOG  
COMPONENTS HERE  
PLACE DIGITAL  
COMPONENTS HERE  
a.  
ADuC7026  
AGND  
DGND  
XCLKI  
45  
12pF  
32.768kHz  
TO  
INTERNAL  
PLL  
44  
12pF  
XCLKO  
PLACE ANALOG  
COMPONENTS  
HERE  
PLACE DIGITAL  
COMPONENTS HERE  
b.  
Figure 77. External Parallel Resonant Crystal Connections  
AGND  
DGND  
To use an external source clock input instead of the PLL (see  
Figure 78), Bit 1 and Bit 0 of PLLCON must be modified.The  
external clock uses P0.7 and XCLK.  
ADuC7026  
PLACE ANALOG  
COMPONENTS HERE  
PLACE DIGITAL  
COMPONENTS HERE  
XCLKO  
c.  
XCLKI  
DGND  
EXTERNAL  
CLOCK  
SOURCE  
TO  
FREQUENCY  
DIVIDER  
XCLK  
Figure 76. System Grounding Schemes  
Figure 78. Connecting an External Clock Source  
In all of these scenarios, and in more complicated real-life  
applications, pay particular attention to the flow of current from  
the supplies and back to ground. Make sure the return paths for  
all currents are as close as possible to the paths the currents  
took to reach their destinations.  
Using an external clock source, the ADuC7019/7020/7021/  
7022/7024/7025/7026/7027’s specified operational clock speed  
range is 50 kHz to 44 MHz ±1ꢀ to ensure correct operation of  
the analog peripherals and Flash/EE.  
Rev. A | Page 84 of 92  
 
 
 
 
 
ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27  
3.3V  
POWER-ON RESET OPERATION  
IOV  
LV  
DD  
An internal power-on reset (POR) is implemented on the  
ADuC7019/7020/7021/7022/7024/7025/7026/7027. For LVDD  
below 2.35 V typical, the internal POR holds the part in reset.  
As LVDD rises above 2.35 V, an internal timer times out for  
typically 128 ms before the part is released from reset. The user  
must ensure that the power supply IOVDD has reached a stable  
2.7 V minimum level by this time. Likewise, on power-down,  
the internal POR holds the ADuC7019/7020/7021/7022/  
7024/7025/7026/7027 in reset until LVDD has dropped below  
2.35 V.  
2.6V  
2.35V TYP  
2.35V TYP  
DD  
128ms TYP  
POR  
0.12ms TYP  
MRST  
Figure 79 illustrates the operation of the internal POR in detail.  
Figure 79. ADuC7019/7020/7021/7022/7024/7025/7026/7027  
Internal Power-on Reset Operation  
TYPICAL SYSTEM CONFIGURATION  
A typical ADuC7020 configuration is shown in Figure 80. It summarizes some of the hardware considerations discussed in the previous  
sections. The bottom of the CSP package has an exposed pad that needs to be soldered to a metal plate on the board for mechanical  
reasons. The metal plate of the board can be connected to ground.  
+
10Ω  
0.01μF  
RS232 INTERFACE*  
0.47μF  
AV  
DD  
STANDARD D-TYPE  
SERIAL COMMS  
CONNECTOR TO  
PC HOST  
40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31  
DV  
DD  
ADM3202  
V
1
2
30  
29  
28  
27  
26  
25  
24  
23  
22  
21  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
C1+  
16  
CC  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
V+  
GND 15  
T1OUT 14  
R1IN 13  
3
GND  
REF  
C1–  
C2+  
C2–  
V–  
4
DAC0  
5
R1OUT 12  
T1IN 11  
ADuC7020  
6
XCLKI  
7
XCLKO  
T2OUT  
R2IN  
T2IN 10  
8
TMS  
TDI  
32.768kHz  
R2OUT  
9
9
10  
P0.0  
1kΩ  
DV  
DD  
1kΩ  
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20  
*EXTERNAL UART TRANSCEIVER INTEGRATED IN SYSTEM OR AS  
PART OF AN EXTERNAL DONGLE AS DESCRIBED IN uC006.  
DV  
DD  
0.47μF  
DV  
DD  
DV  
DD  
AV  
DD  
1
2
3
4
5
6
DV  
DD  
ADP3333-3.3  
OUT IN  
TRST  
TDI  
1.5Ω  
270Ω  
GND SD  
TMS  
TCK  
7
8
10μF  
10μF  
0.1μF  
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
TDO  
NOT CONNECTED IN THIS EXAMPLE  
Figure 80. Typical System Configuration  
Rev. A | Page 85 of 92  
 
 
 
ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27  
DEVELOPMENT TOOLS  
PC-BASED TOOLS  
Software  
Integrated development environment, incorporating  
assembler, compiler, and nonintrusive JTAG-based  
debugger  
Four types of development systems are available for the  
ADuC7019/7020/7021/7022/7024/7025/7026/7027 family:  
The ADuC7026 QuickStart Plus is intended for new users  
who want to have a comprehensive hardware development  
environment. Since the ADuC7026 contains the superset of  
functions available on the ADuC7019/7020/7021/  
7022/7024/7025/7026/7027 family, it is suitable for users  
who wish to develop on any of the parts in this family. All  
of the parts are fully code compatible.  
Serial downloader software  
Example code  
Miscellaneous  
CD-ROM documentation  
IN-CIRCUIT SERIAL DOWNLOADER  
The ADuC7020, ADuC7024, and ADuC7026 QuickStart  
are intended for users who already have an emulator.  
The serial downloader is a Windows application that allows the  
user to serially download an assembled program to the on-chip  
program Flash/EE memory via the serial port on a standard PC.  
These systems consist of the following PC-based (Windows®  
compatible) hardware and software development tools:  
The UART based serial downloader is included in all the  
development systems and is usable with ADuC7019/7020/7021/  
7022/7024/7025/7026/7027 that do not contain the “I” suffix in  
the ordering guide.  
Hardware  
ADuC7019/7020/7021/7022/7024/7025/7026/7027  
evaluation board  
An I2C based serial downloader is also available at  
www.analog.com. This software requires an USB to I2C  
adaptor board available from http://www.fh-pforzheim.de/  
stw-svs/texte/Dongle.html. The I2C based serial downloader  
is only usable with the part models containing the “I” suffix  
in the ordering guide.  
Serial port programming cable  
RDI compliant JTAG emulator (included in the  
ADuC7026 QuickStart Plus only)  
Rev. A | Page 86 of 92  
 
ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27  
OUTLINE DIMENSIONS  
6.00  
BSC SQ  
0.60 MAX  
0.60 MAX  
PIN 1  
INDICATOR  
31  
40  
1
30  
PIN 1  
INDICATOR  
0.50  
BSC  
TOP  
VIEW  
4.25  
4.10 SQ  
3.95  
5.75  
BCS SQ  
EXPOSED  
PAD  
(BOTTOM VIEW)  
0.50  
0.40  
0.30  
21  
10  
11  
20  
0.25 MIN  
4.50  
REF  
12° MAX  
0.80 MAX  
0.65 TYP  
0.05 MAX  
0.02 NOM  
1.00  
0.85  
0.80  
0.30  
0.23  
0.18  
COPLANARITY  
0.08  
0.20 REF  
SEATING  
PLANE  
COMPLIANT TO JEDEC STANDARDS MO-220-VJJD-2  
Figure 81. 40-Lead Frame Chip Scale Package [LFCSP_VQ]  
6 mm x 6 mm Body, Very Thin Quad  
(CP-40)  
Dimensions shown in millimeters  
0.30  
0.25  
0.18  
9.00  
BSC SQ  
0.60 MAX  
0.60 MAX  
PIN 1  
INDICATOR  
64  
49  
48  
1
PIN 1  
INDICATOR  
*
4.85  
4.70 SQ  
4.55  
8.75  
BSC SQ  
TOP  
VIEW  
0.45  
33  
32  
16  
17  
0.40  
0.35  
7.50  
REF  
0.80 MAX  
1.00  
0.85  
0.80  
12° MAX  
0.65 TYP  
0.05 MAX  
0.02 NOM  
SEATING  
PLANE  
0.50 BSC  
0.20 REF  
*
COMPLIANT TO JEDEC STANDARDS MO-220-VMMD-4  
EXCEPT FOR EXPOSED PAD DIMENSION  
Figure 82. 64-Lead Frame Chip Scale Package [LFCSP_VQ]  
9 mm x 9 mm Body, Very Thin Quad  
(CP-64-1)  
Dimensions shown in millimeters  
Rev. A | Page 87 of 92  
 
ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27  
0.75  
0.60  
0.45  
12.00  
BSC SQ  
1.60  
MAX  
64  
49  
1
48  
PIN 1  
10.00  
BSC SQ  
TOP VIEW  
(PINS DOWN)  
1.45  
0.20  
1.40  
0.09  
1.35  
7°  
3.5°  
0°  
0.08 MAX  
COPLANARITY  
16  
33  
0.15  
0.05  
SEATING  
PLANE  
17  
32  
VIEW A  
0.27  
0.22  
0.17  
0.50  
BSC  
LEAD PITCH  
VIEW A  
ROTATED 90° CCW  
COMPLIANT TO JEDEC STANDARDS MS-026-BCD  
Figure 83. 64-Lead Low Profile Quad Flat Package [LQFP]  
(ST-64-2)  
Dimensions shown in millimeters  
14.00  
BSC SQ  
0.75  
0.60  
0.45  
1.60  
MAX  
80  
61  
60  
1
PIN  
1
12.00  
BSC SQ  
TOP VIEW  
(PINS DOWN)  
1.45  
1.40  
1.35  
0.20  
0.09  
7°  
3.5°  
0°  
20  
41  
0.15  
0.05  
21  
40  
SEATING  
PLANE  
0.08 MAX  
COPLANARITY  
VIEW A  
0.50  
BSC  
0.27  
0.22  
0.17  
LEAD PITCH  
VIEW A  
ROTATED 90° CCW  
COMPLIANT TO JEDEC STANDARDS MS-026-BDD  
Figure 84. 80-Lead Low Profile Quad Flat Package [LQFP]  
(ST-80-1)  
Dimensions shown in millimeters  
Rev. A | Page 88 of 92  
ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27  
ORDERING GUIDE  
ADC  
DAC  
Channels  
Temperature  
FLASH/RAM GPIO Downloader Range  
Package  
Description  
Package  
Option  
Ordering  
Quantity  
Model  
Channels  
ADuC7019BCPZ62I1  
52  
3
3
3
4
4
4
4
4
4
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
62 kB/8 kB  
62 kB/8 kB  
62 kB/8 kB  
62 kB/8 kB  
62 kB/8 kB  
62 kB/8 kB  
62 kB/8 kB  
62 kB/8 kB  
62 kB/8 kB  
62 kB/8 kB  
62 kB/8 kB  
62 kB/8 kB  
62 kB/8 kB  
62 kB/8 kB  
62 kB/8 kB  
32 kB/4 kB  
32 kB/4 kB  
32 kB/4 kB  
62 kB/8 kB  
62 kB/8 kB  
62 kB/8 kB  
32 kB/4 kB  
32 kB/4 kB  
32 kB/4 kB  
62 kB/8 kB  
62 kB/8 kB  
62 kB/8 kB  
62 kB/8 kB  
62 kB/8 kB  
14  
14  
14  
14  
14  
14  
14  
14  
14  
13  
13  
13  
13  
13  
13  
13  
13  
13  
13  
13  
13  
13  
13  
13  
30  
30  
30  
30  
30  
I2C  
−40°C to  
+125°C  
40-Lead LFCSP_VQ  
40-Lead LFCSP_VQ  
40-Lead LFCSP_VQ  
40-Lead LFCSP_VQ  
40-Lead LFCSP_VQ  
40-Lead LFCSP_VQ  
40-Lead LFCSP_VQ  
40-Lead LFCSP_VQ  
40-Lead LFCSP_VQ  
40-Lead LFCSP_VQ  
40-Lead LFCSP_VQ  
40-Lead LFCSP_VQ  
40-Lead LFCSP_VQ  
40-Lead LFCSP_VQ  
40-Lead LFCSP_VQ  
40-Lead LFCSP_VQ  
40-Lead LFCSP_VQ  
40-Lead LFCSP_VQ  
40-Lead LFCSP_VQ  
40-Lead LFCSP_VQ  
40-Lead LFCSP_VQ  
40-Lead LFCSP_VQ  
40-Lead LFCSP_VQ  
40-Lead LFCSP_VQ  
64-Lead LFCSP_VQ  
64-Lead LFCSP_VQ  
64-Lead LFCSP_VQ  
64-Lead LQFP  
CP-40  
CP-40  
CP-40  
CP-40  
CP-40  
CP-40  
CP-40  
CP-40  
CP-40  
CP-40  
CP-40  
CP-40  
CP-40  
CP-40  
CP-40  
CP-40  
CP-40  
CP-40  
CP-40  
CP-40  
CP-40  
CP-40  
CP-40  
CP-40  
CP-64-1  
CP-64-1  
CP-64-1  
ST-64-2  
ST-64-2  
ADuC7019BCPZ62I-RL1  
52  
I2C  
−40°C to  
+125°C  
2,500  
750  
ADuC7019BCPZ62IRL71 52  
I2C  
−40°C to  
+125°C  
ADuC7020BCPZ621  
5
UART  
UART  
UART  
I2C  
−40°C to  
+125°C  
ADuC7020BCPZ62-RL1  
5
−40°C to  
+125°C  
2,500  
750  
ADuC7020BCPZ62-  
RL71  
ADuC7020BCPZ62I1  
5
−40°C to  
+125°C  
5
−40°C to  
+125°C  
ADuC7020BCPZ62I-RL1  
ADuC7020BCPZ62IRL71  
5
I2C  
−40°C to  
+125°C  
2,500  
750  
5
I2C  
−40°C to  
+125°C  
ADuC7021BCPZ621  
8
UART  
UART  
UART  
I2C  
−40°C to  
+125°C  
ADuC7021BCPZ62-RL1  
8
−40°C to  
+125°C  
2,500  
750  
ADuC7021BCPZ62-  
RL71  
ADuC7021BCPZ62I1  
8
−40°C to  
+125°C  
8
−40°C to  
+125°C  
ADuC7021BCPZ62I-RL1  
ADuC7021BCPZ62IRL71  
8
I2C  
−40°C to  
+125°C  
2,500  
750  
8
I2C  
−40°C to  
+125°C  
ADuC7021BCPZ321  
8
UART  
UART  
UART  
UART  
UART  
UART  
UART  
UART  
UART  
UART  
UART  
UART  
UART  
UART  
−40°C to  
+125°C  
ADuC7021BCPZ32-RL1  
8
−40°C to  
+125°C  
2,500  
750  
ADuC7021BCPZ32-  
RL71  
ADuC7022BCPZ621  
8
−40°C to  
+125°C  
10  
10  
10  
10  
10  
10  
10  
10  
10  
10  
10  
−40°C to  
+125°C  
ADuC7022BCPZ62-RL1  
−40°C to  
+125°C  
2,500  
750  
ADuC7022BCPZ62-  
RL71  
ADuC7022BCPZ321  
−40°C to  
+125°C  
−40°C to  
+125°C  
ADuC7022BCPZ32-RL1  
−40°C to  
+125°C  
2,500  
750  
ADuC7022BCPZ32-  
RL71  
ADuC7024BCPZ621  
−40°C to  
+125°C  
2
2
2
2
2
−40°C to  
+125°C  
ADuC7024BCPZ62-RL1  
−40°C to  
+125°C  
2,500  
750  
ADuC7024BCPZ62-  
RL71  
ADuC7024BSTZ621  
−40°C to  
+125°C  
−40°C to  
+125°C  
ADuC7024BSTZ62-RL1  
−40°C to  
+125°C  
64-Lead LQFP  
1,000  
Rev. A | Page 89 of 92  
 
ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27  
ADC  
Channels  
DAC  
Channels  
Temperature  
FLASH/RAM GPIO Downloader Range  
Package  
Description  
Package  
Option  
Ordering  
Quantity  
Model  
ADuC7025BCPZ621  
12  
12  
12  
12  
12  
12  
12  
12  
12  
62 kB/8 kB  
62 kB/8 kB  
62 kB/8 kB  
32 kB/4 kB  
32 kB/4 kB  
32 kB/4 kB  
62 kB/8 kB  
62 kB/8 kB  
62 kB/8 kB  
62 kB/8 kB  
62 kB/8 kB  
62 kB/8 kB  
62 kB/8 kB  
62 kB/8 kB  
30  
30  
30  
30  
30  
30  
30  
30  
40  
40  
40  
40  
40  
40  
UART  
UART  
UART  
UART  
UART  
UART  
UART  
UART  
UART  
UART  
I2C  
−40°C to  
+125°C  
64-Lead LFCSP_VQ  
64-Lead LFCSP_VQ  
64-Lead LFCSP_VQ  
64-Lead LFCSP_VQ  
64-Lead LFCSP_VQ  
64-Lead LFCSP_VQ  
64-Lead LQFP  
CP-64-1  
CP-64-1  
CP-64-1  
CP-64-1  
CP-64-1  
CP-64-1  
ST-64-2  
ST-64-2  
ST-80-1  
ST-80-1  
ST-80-1  
ST-80-1  
ST-80-1  
ST-80-1  
ADuC7025BCPZ62-RL1  
−40°C to  
+125°C  
2,500  
750  
ADuC7025BCPZ62-  
RL71  
ADuC7025BCPZ321  
−40°C to  
+125°C  
−40°C to  
+125°C  
ADuC7025BCPZ32-RL1  
−40°C to  
+125°C  
2,500  
750  
ADuC7025BCPZ32-  
RL71  
ADuC7025BSTZ621  
−40°C to  
+125°C  
−40°C to  
+125°C  
ADuC7025BSTZ62-RL1  
−40°C to  
+125°C  
64-Lead LQFP  
1,000  
1,000  
1,000  
1,000  
ADuC7026BSTZ621, 3  
4
4
4
4
−40°C to  
+125°C  
80-Lead LQFP  
ADuC7026BSTZ62-RL1, 3 12  
−40°C to  
+125°C  
80-Lead LQFP  
ADuC7026BSTZ62I1, 3  
12  
12  
16  
16  
−40°C to  
+125°C  
80-Lead LQFP  
ADuC7026BSTZ62I-RL1,  
I2C  
−40°C to  
+125°C  
80-Lead LQFP  
3
ADuC7027BSTZ621, 3  
UART  
UART  
−40°C to  
+125°C  
80-Lead LQFP  
ADuC7027BSTZ62-RL1, 3  
−40°C to  
+125°C  
80-Lead LQFP  
EVAL-ADuC7020MK  
EVAL-ADuC7020QS  
ADuC7020 MiniKit  
ADuC7020  
QuickStart  
Development  
System  
EVAL-ADuC7024QS  
EVAL-ADuC7026QS  
EVAL-ADuC7026QSP  
ADuC7024  
QuickStart  
Development  
System  
ADuC7026  
QuickStart  
Development  
System  
ADuC7026  
QuickStart Plus  
Development  
System  
1 Z = Pb-free part.  
2 One of the ADC channels is internally buffered.  
3 Includes external memory interface.  
Rev. A | Page 90 of 92  
 
ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27  
NOTES  
Rev. A | Page 91 of 92  
ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27  
NOTES  
Purchase of licensed I2C components of Analog Devices or one of its sublicensed Associated Companies conveys a license for the purchaser under the Philips I2C Patent  
Rights to use these components in an I2C system, provided that the system conforms to the I2C Standard Specification as defined by Philips.  
©2006 Analog Devices, Inc. All rights reserved. Trademarks and  
registered trademarks are the property of their respective owners.  
D04955-0-1/06(A)  
Rev. A | Page 92 of 92  

相关型号:

ADuC7019BCPZ62I

Precision Analog Microcontroller, 12-Bit Analog I/O, ARM7TDMI MCU
ADI

ADuC7019BCPZ62I-RL

Precision Analog Microcontroller, 12-Bit Analog I/O, ARM7TDMI MCU
ADI

ADuC7019BCPZ62IRL7

Precision Analog Microcontroller, 12-Bit Analog I/O, ARM7TDMI MCU
ADI

ADUC7019_13

Precision Analog Microcontroller, 12-Bit Analog I/O, ARM7TDMI MCU
ADI

ADUC7019_15

Precision Analog Microcontroller, 12-Bit Analog I/O, ARM7TDMI MCU
ADI

ADUC702

Precision Analog Microcontroller 12-bit Analog I/O, ARM7TDMI MCU
ADI

ADUC7020

Precision Analog Microcontroller 12-bit Analog I/O, ARM7TDMI MCU
ADI

ADUC7020BCP62

Precision Analog Microcontroller 12-bit Analog I/O, ARM7TDMI MCU
ADI

ADuC7020BCPZ62

Precision Analog Microcontroller, 12-Bit Analog I/O, ARM7TDMI MCU
ADI

ADUC7020BCPZ62-RL

IC 32-BIT, FLASH, 44 MHz, RISC MICROCONTROLLER, QCC40, 6 X 6 MM, ROHS COMPLIANT, MO-220VJJD-2, LFCSP-40, Microcontroller
ADI

ADuC7020BCPZ62-RL7

Precision Analog Microcontroller, 12-Bit Analog I/O, ARM7TDMI MCU
ADI

ADuC7020BCPZ62I

Precision Analog Microcontroller, 12-Bit Analog I/O, ARM7TDMI MCU
ADI